advertisement
Dell Wyse ThinOS Version 9.1
Administrator’s Guide
April 2021
Rev. A01
Notes, cautions, and warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
© 2021 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Upload and push ThinOS 9.x application packages using Groups and Configs on Wyse Management
Contents 3
4 Contents
Contents 5
6 Contents
Contents 7
8 Contents
Contents 9
1
Introduction
Thin clients running Dell Wyse ThinOS firmware are designed solely for optimal thin client security and performance. These efficient purpose-built thin clients offer ultrafast access to applications, files, and network resources within Virtual Desktop
Infrastructure (VDI) environments. With zero attack surface, unpublished API, and encrypted data Wyse ThinOS is virus and malware resistant.
Wyse ThinOS requires a management software to configure, operate, and update thereby eliminating the need for IT support to visit or touch the physical devices. Dell Wyse Management Suite is the next generation management solution that enables you to centrally configure, monitor, manage, and optimize your ThinOS-based thin clients. As the number of devices grows, the
Wyse Management Suite offers process automation and helps lower costs for large deployments of thin clients. With secure
HTTPS-based communications and active directory authentication for role-based administration, Wyse Management Suite keeps your thin clients always up-to-date. The mobile application enables IT to view critical alerts, notifications on the dashboard, and send real-time commands.
This guide is intended for administrators of thin clients running Wyse ThinOS and using Wyse Management Suite to manage thin clients. It provides information and detailed system configurations to help you design and manage a ThinOS environment using
Wyse Management Suite.
Supported platforms
The Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 firmware is supported on the following Dell Wyse thin clients:
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
NOTE: Wyse 3040 Thin Client is for users who work mostly on tasks with limited multimedia requirements. It is not applicable for using multimedia such as BCR, HTML 5 video redirection, Window multimedia redirection, RTOP video call, JVDI video call, enable video or share screen with Microsoft Teams, Webex Meetings, Webex Teams or Zoom. It is recommended to use Wyse 5070, 5470 AIO, or 5470 thin clients for high multimedia requirements.
What's new in ThinOS 9.1.2101
ThinOS updates
● Updated the default selection on Shutdown menu from Restart to Shutdown .
● Flash protection reliability is enhanced in this release to extend flash life.
● Changed the default ThinOS background image.
● Supports new keyboard layouts. For more information, see
Configure the keyboard settings
.
● Supports new webcams. For information about supported cameras, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release
Notes at www.dell.com/support .
● Added new options under Customize
● Added a new app list value in the proxy settings. For more information, see
.
●
.
● Updated the VNC password criteria for VNC services. For more information, see
.
● Supports using HID Global Identification Software with HID Fingerprint reader in Citrix ICA session. For more information, see
Configure the HID Fingerprint reader settings
.
Citrix updates
● Updated the Citrix Workspace app to version 2101.
10 Introduction
●
.
● Added the support to export citrix logs. For more information, see
Export Citrix Workspace App logs
.
Windows Virtual Desktop and Remote Desktop Protocol updates
● Supports logging in to Windows Virtual Desktop using Active Directory Federation Services. For more information, see
Log in to Windows Virtual Desktop using Active Directory Federation Services
.
● Supports automatic connection on startup. For more information, see
Add a Remote Desktop Protocol connection
.
● Supports Remote Desktop Gateway. For more information, see
Log in to RDP session using Remote Desktop Gateway
.
Imprivata updates
● Added silent mode in Imprivata PIE. For more information, see
.
● Added the fingerprint reader configurations for Citrix ICA, PcoIP, and VMware Blast sessions. For more information, see
Configure Imprivata fingerprint reader for Citrix ICA and PcoIP sessions
and
Configure Imprivata fingerprint reader for Blast session .
Teradici update—Added a certificate check for Teradici Cloud Access Broker agent connection. For more information, see
Configure the Teradici Cloud Access broker connection .
Supports Bloomberg keyboard. For more information, see
.
Introduction 11
2
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
It is recommended to use the Wyse Management Suite version 3.1 or later to upgrade your ThinOS firmware to 9.1. You can also use the USB Imaging Tool version 3.4.0 to install the ThinOS 9.1 Merlin image on your thin client. If you are using ThinOS v8.5
or earlier versions, you must first upgrade your device to ThinOS v8.6 before installing ThinOS 9.1. ThinOS 9.1 displays a change group notification message on the device after you change the group in Wyse Management Suite. A new firmware or package message is also displayed when you deploy a new firmware or package using Wyse Management Suite.
All device settings are erased after you upgrade from ThinOS 8.6 to 9.1 except the following settings:
● Wyse Management Suite group token and server settings
● Static DNS
● Certificates
● IEEE802.1x wired authentication settings—Password set for security types EAP-PEAP-GTC/EAP-FAST-GTC by using Wyse
Management Suite or INI parameters are not preserved.
● Wireless connections
○ Password set for security types EAP-PEAP-GTC/EAP-FAST-GTC by using Wyse Management Suite or INI parameters are not preserved.
○ The WEP/Sharekey security type is changed to Open as they are not supported in ThinOS 9.1.
○ The WPA-Personal security type does not work after upgrade. However, the WPA2-Personal security type works on
ThinOS 9.1.
● Proxy settings
NOTE: When you upgrade from ThinOS 9.0 to 9.1, the thin client downloads all the application packages that are applicable to 9.1. But after upgrade to 9.1, all the application packages are removed and you must reinstall the application packages.
Dell Technologies recommends that you upgrade from ThinOS 9.0 to 9.1 without the installation of any application packages.
NOTE: If you add multiple application packages along with the operating system image in the same Wyse Management
Suite group, the upgrade may fail due to the low disk space. In this scenario, you must reset to factory default settings for upgrading the ThinOS client again.
The overall upgrade process using Wyse Management Suite includes the following tasks:
1. Register your thin client to Wyse Management Suite.
● Register ThinOS devices using Central Configuration. See
Register ThinOS devices using Wyse Device Agent
.
● Register ThinOS devices using DHCP option tags. See
Register devices by using DHCP option tags .
2. Download the ThinOS 9.1 operating system image. See Download the ThinOS firmware .
3. Upload the ThinOS 9.1 firmware to the Wyse Management Suite repository. See
Add ThinOS firmware to repository
.
4. Upgrade the ThinOS firmware from 8.6 to 9.x. See
Upgrade ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.x
5. Upgrade the ThinOS firmware from 9.x to later versions. See Upgrade ThinOS 9.x to later versions
.
NOTE: You must first upgrade to 9.1 base image, and then install other application packages.
6. Deploy the application packages. See
Upload and push ThinOS 9.1 application packages
.
For detailed information about the upgrade process, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Migration Guide at www.dell.com/support .
NOTE: You cannot boot into ThinOS 9.1 when you perform any of the following operations in BIOS setup:
● Disable the on-board Network Interface Card (NIC), Trusted Platform Module (TPM), or Platform Trust Technology
(PTT).
● Clear TPM or PTT.
● Reset BIOS to factory default settings
Table 1. Firmware images
Platform ThinOS firmware image for upgrading from 8.6 to
9.1
Wyse 3040 Thin Client A10Q_wnos
ThinOS PCoIP image for upgrading from 8.6 to 9.1
PA10Q_wnos
ThinOS firmware image for upgrading from 9.x to later versions
DTOS_version.pkg
12 Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
Table 1. Firmware images (continued)
Platform
Wyse 5070 Thin Client
—Celeron processor
ThinOS firmware image for upgrading from 8.6 to
9.1
X10_wnos
Wyse 5070 Thin Client
—Pentium processor
Wyse 5070 Extended
Thin Client—Pentium processor
X10_wnos
X10_wnos
Wyse 5470 Thin Client X10_wnos
Wyse 5470 All-in-One
Thin Client
X10_wnos
ThinOS PCoIP image for upgrading from 8.6 to 9.1
PX10_wnos
PX10_wnos
PX10_wnos
PX10_wnos
PX10_wnos
ThinOS firmware image for upgrading from 9.x to later versions
DTOS_version.pkg
DTOS_version.pkg
DTOS_version.pkg
DTOS_version.pkg
DTOS_version.pkg
Table 2. Package information
Name Description Package installation
Citrix_Workspace_App
Teradici_PCoIP
VMware_Horizon
The package supports Citrix Workspace app with RTME client integrated.
The package supports the Teradici PCoIP connection.
The package supports VMware Blast.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Imprivata_PIE The package supports Imprivata with ProveID
Embedded feature.
The package supports Cisco Jabber.
Cisco_Jabber
Zoom_Horizon
Zoom_Citrix
The package supports Zoom Meetings for
VMware Horizon.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
The package supports Zoom Meetings for Citrix. Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Cisco_WebEx_Meetings The package supports Cisco Webex Meetings.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Cisco_WebEx_VDI
Microsoft_WVD
Jabra
EPOS_Connect
HID_Fingerprint_Reader
The package supports Cisco Webex VDI.
The package supports Windows Virtual Desktop. Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
The package supports Jabra headsets.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
The package supports EPOS Connect.
The package supports HID Fingerprint Reader.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Upload the new package using Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
NOTE: If the package fails to update, or if the thin client does not work after upgrading to the new firmware, remove all packages and reboot the thin client. Reinstall the package after the reboot.
If the BIOS password is set to the default value or no password is specified, the BIOS Secure Boot option is automatically enabled after the device is upgraded to ThinOS 9.1. If you want to downgrade to ThinOS 8.6 or ThinOS 9.0 Merlin image, do the following:
1. Reboot the device and press the F2 key to enter the Dell BIOS setup.
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware 13
2. Go to Secure Boot > Secure Boot Enable and clear the Secure Boot Enable check box.
3. Go to Security > TPM 2.0/PTT Security and select the clear check box. If this option is not available in BIOS, you can ignore this step.
NOTE:
Ensure that the BIOS version on Wyse 5070 Thin Client is 1.3.1 or later before you upgrade to ThinOS 9.1. If you upgrade to ThinOS 9.1 with older BIOS version first and then upgrade to BIOS 1.3.1 or later, the device fails to boot the ThinOS operating system.
Register ThinOS devices to Wyse Management Suite
NOTE: DHCP and DNS configurations for Wyse Management Suite work only after you reset the device to factory default settings.
Register ThinOS devices using Wyse Device Agent
Steps
1. From the desktop menu of the thin client, go to System Setup > Central Configuration .
The Central Configuration window is displayed.
2. Enter the Group Registration Key as configured by your administrator for the wanted group.
3. Select the Enable WMS Advanced Settings check box.
4. In the WMS server field, enter the Wyse Management Server URL.
5. In the Group Registration Key field, enter the group registration key as configured by your Wyse Management Suite administrator for your group. To verify the setup, click Validate Key . If the key is not validated, verify the group key and
Wyse Management Suite server URL which you have provided. Ensure that ports mentioned are not blocked by the network.
The default ports are 443 and 1883.
NOTE: If the Group Token parameter is not specified, the device is moved to the unmanaged group or quarantine group.
6. Enable or disable CA validation based on your license type. For public cloud, select the Enable CA Validation check box, and for private cloud, select the Enable CA Validation check box if you have imported certificates from a well-known certificate authority into your Wyse Management Suite server.
To enable the CA validation option in the private cloud, you must install the same self-signed certificate on the ThinOS device as well. If you have not installed the self-signed certificate in the ThinOS device, do not select the Enable CA
Validation check box. You can install the certificate to the device by using Wyse Management Suite after registration, and then enable the CA validation option.
7. Click OK .
The device is registered to Wyse Management Suite.
Register ThinOS devices by using DHCP option tags
About this task
You can register the devices by using the following DHCP option tags:
Table 3. Registering device by using DHCP option tags
Option Tag Description
Name —WMS
Data Type —String
Code —165
Description —WMS Server FQDN
This tag points to the Wyse Management Suite server URL. For example, wmsserver.acme.com:443 , where wmsserver.acme.com is fully qualified domain name of the server where Wyse Management Suite is installed.
Name —WMS This tag points to the MQTT server URL. This is optional.
14 Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
Table 3. Registering device by using DHCP option tags (continued)
Option Tag Description
Data Type —String
Code —166
Description —MQTT
Name —CA Validation
Data Type —String
Code —167
Description —Certificate Authority
Validation
You can enable or disable CA validation option if you are registering your devices with Wyse Management Suite on private cloud.
Enter True , if you have imported the SSL certificates from a well-known authority for https communication between the client and Wyse Management
Suite server.
Enter False , if you have not imported the SSL certificates from a well-known authority for https communication between the client and Wyse Management
Suite server.
Name —Group Registration Key
Data Type —String
Code —199
Description —Group Registration Key
This tag directs to the Group Registration Key for the Wyse Management Suite agent.
Download the ThinOS firmware, BIOS, and application packages
About this task
This section describes the steps to download the ThinOS firmware, BIOS, and application packages from Dell support site.
Steps
1. Go to www.dell.com/support .
2. In the Enter a Service Tag, Serial Number, Service Request, Model, or Keyword field, type the model number of your device.
3. Select the product from the searched results to load the product page.
4. On the product support page, click Drivers & downloads .
5. Select the operating system as ThinOS 9.1
.
6. Locate the ThinOS image entry and download the image.
Table 4. ThinOS 9.1.2101 image
Scenario
Upgrade your ThinOS 9.1.1131 to
9.1.2101
ThinOS image title
ThinOS 9.1.1131 to ThinOS 9.1.2101 Image file for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
Upgrade your ThinOS 9.0.x to
9.1.2101
Install the ThinOS 9.1.2101
Merlin image using USB Imaging
Tool
ThinOS 9.0 to ThinOS 9.1.2101 Image file for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and
5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.2101 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5070 Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.2101 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5470 Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.2101 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.2101 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 3040 Thin Clients .
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware 15
Table 5. ThinOS 9.1.1131 image
Scenario
Upgrade your ThinOS 8.6 to
9.1.1131
ThinOS image title
ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1.1131 Base Image file for Dell Wyse 5070, 5470 and
5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1.1131 Base Image file for Dell Wyse 5070, 5470 and
5470 All-in-One Thin Clients with PCoIP .
ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1.1131 Base Image file for Dell Wyse 3040 Thin Clients .
Upgrade your ThinOS 9.0 to
9.1.1131
Install the ThinOS 9.1.1131 Merlin image using USB Imaging Tool
ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1.1131 Base Image file for Dell Wyse 3040 Thin Clients with PCoIP .
ThinOS 9 to ThinOS 9.1.1131 Base Image file for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and
5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.1131 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5070 Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.1131 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5470 Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.1131 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1.1131 Merlin Image file for Dell Wyse 3040 Thin Clients .
NOTE: If you are using the Dell Wyse USB Imaging Tool to install the ThinOS image on a single client, you must download the ThinOS 9.1 Merlin image
7. If you want to use ThinOS packages, locate a package and download the package to your device.
Table 6. ThinOS packages
ThinOS packages
Citrix_Workspace_App
ThinOS image title
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Citrix package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and
5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
VMware_Horizon
Teradici_PCoIP
Microsoft_WVD
Imprivata_PIE
Zoom_Horizon
Zoom_Citrix
Jabra
EPOS_Connect
Cisco_WebEx_VDI
Cisco_WebEx_Meetings
Cisco_Jabber
ThinOS 9.1 <version> VMware Horizon package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Teradici PCoIP package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Microsoft WVD package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Imprivata package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Zoom Horizon package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Zoom Citrix package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070, 5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Jabra headsets package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> EPOS Connect package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Cisco Webex VDI package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Cisco Webex Meetings package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040,
5070, 5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
ThinOS 9.1 <version> Cisco Jabber package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040, 5070,
5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
16 Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
Table 6. ThinOS packages (continued)
ThinOS packages
HID_Fingerprint_Reader
ThinOS image title
ThinOS 9.1 <version> HID Fingerprint Reader package <version> for Dell Wyse 3040,
5070, 5470 and 5470 All-in-One Thin Clients .
8. If you want to install the latest BIOS package, locate the package entry— ThinOS 9.1 <version> BIOS package <version>
—for your thin client model and click the download icon.
NOTE:
For more information about BIOS installation, see BIOS Installation
.
File naming convention
ThinOS application packages, ThinOS firmware, and BIOS packages support the following characters in their file names:
● Uppercase letter
● Lowercase letter
● Numeric character
● Special characters—period (.), hyphen-minus (-), and underscores (_)
If you use other characters in file names, the package installation fails.
Add ThinOS 9.x firmware to the repository
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite.
2. In the Apps & Data tab, under OS Image Repository , click ThinOS 9.x
.
3. Click Add Firmware file .
The Add File screen is displayed.
4. To select a file, click Browse and go to the location where your file is located.
5. Enter the description for your file.
6. Select the check box if you want to override an existing file.
7. Click Upload .
NOTE: The file is added to the repository when you select the check box but it is not assigned to any of the groups or devices. To deploy firmware to a device or a group of devices, go to the respective device or the group configuration page.
NOTE: The operator can upload the firmware from operator account and is visible to all the tenants. Tenants cannot delete or modify the files.
Upgrade ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.x
Prerequisites
● The ThinOS conversion image must be added to the ThinOS firmware repository. For more information, see
Add ThinOS firmware to repository
.
● Create a group in Wyse Management Suite with a group token. Use this group token to register the ThinOS 8.6 devices.
● The thin client must be registered to Wyse Management Suite.
● Do not configure any wallpaper settings on Wyse Management Suite.
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select a group.
2. From the Edit Policies drop-down menu, click ThinOS .
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware 17
The Select ThinOS Configuration Mode window is displayed.
3. Select Advanced Configuration Mode .
4. Go to Firmware Upgrade , and click Configure this item .
5. Clear the Disable Live Upgrade and Verify Signature options.
6. From the Platform Type drop-down list, select the platform.
7. From the Firmware to auto-deploy drop-down list, select the firmware added to the repository.
8. Click Save & Publish .
The firmware is deployed to the thin client. The conversion process takes 15-20 s, and the thin client restarts automatically.
NOTE: After you upgrade the firmware, the device is automatically registered to Wyse Management Suite. The configurations of 8.6 build are not inherited after you upgrade the firmware.
Upgrade ThinOS 9.x to later versions using Wyse
Management Suite
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have created a group in Wyse Management Suite with a group token. Use this group token to register the
ThinOS 9.x devices.
● Ensure that the thin client is registered to Wyse Management Suite.
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select a group.
2. From the Edit Policies drop-down menu, click ThinOS 9.x
.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
3. Click Advanced .
4. In the Firmware field, select OS Firmware Updates .
5. Click Browse to browse and upload the firmware.
The EULA details of the package and the name of the vendors are displayed.
6. Click the vendor names to read the license agreement of each vendor and then click Accept to upload the package.
You can select the Do not show this again if you do not want to see the EULA details of the same vendor again.
NOTE: If you upload multiple packages, the EULA details of each package is displayed. You must accept the license agreement of the packages individually. The firmware is not uploaded if you click Decline .
7. From the Select the ThinOS Firmware to deploy drop-down menu, select the uploaded firmware.
8. Click Save & Publish .
The thin client downloads the firmware and restarts. The firmware version is upgraded.
Upgrade ThinOS 9.x to later versions using Admin
Policy Tool
The firmware upgrade using Admin Policy Tool is supported on ThinOS 9.x.
Steps
1. Go to the Admin Policy Tool on the ThinOS client.
2. In the Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed. Click Advanced .
3. In the Firmware field, select OS Firmware Updates .
4. Click Browse to browse and upload the firmware.
5. From the Select the ThinOS Firmware to deploy drop-down menu, select the uploaded firmware.
6. Click Save & Publish .
The thin client downloads the firmware and restarts. The firmware version is upgraded.
18 Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
Add ThinOS application packages to the repository
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite using your tenant credentials.
2. In the Apps & Data tab, under OS Image Repository , click ThinOS 9.x
.
3. Click Add Package file .
The Add Package screen is displayed.
4. To select a file, click Browse and go to the location where your file is located.
● If the EULA is embedded in the package, the EULA details of the package and the name of the vendors are displayed.
You can click the vendor names to read the license agreement of each vendor. Click Accept to upload the package. You can select the Do not show this again if you do not want to see the EULA details of the same vendor again. You must accept the license agreement of the packages individually. The package is not uploaded if you click Decline .
● If the EULA is not embedded in the package, go to step 5.
5. Click Upload .
NOTE: The operator can upload the package from operator account and is visible to all the tenants. Tenants cannot delete or modify these files.
Upload and push ThinOS 9.x application packages using Groups and Configs on Wyse Management Suite
Prerequisites
● Create a group in Wyse Management Suite with a group token. Use this group token to register the ThinOS 9.x devices.
● Register the thin client to Wyse Management Suite.
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select a group.
2. From the Edit Policies drop-down menu, click ThinOS 9.x
.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
3. Click Advanced .
4. In the Firmware field, click Application Package Updates .
5. To select a file, click Browse and go to the location where your file is located.
● If the EULA is embedded in the package, the EULA details of the package and the name of the vendors are displayed.
You can click the vendor names to read the license agreement of each vendor. Click Accept to upload the package. You can select the Do not show this again if you do not want to see the EULA details of the same vendor again. If you upload multiple packages, the EULA details of each package is displayed. You must accept the license agreement of the packages individually. The package is not uploaded if you click Decline .
● If the EULA is not embedded in the package, go to step 6.
NOTE: You can upload and deploy multiple firmware packages from the remote repository, tenant cloud repository or operator cloud repository.
6. From the Select the ThinOS Package(s) to deploy drop-down menu, select the package.
7. Click Save & Publish .
The thin client restarts and the application package is installed.
Upload and install ThinOS 9.x application packages using Admin Policy Tool
Steps
1. Go to the Admin Policy Tool on the ThinOS client.
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware 19
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
2. Click Advanced .
3. In the Firmware field, click Application Package Updates .
4. Browse and select the package.
5. From the Select the ThinOS Package(s) to deploy drop-down menu, select the uploaded package.
NOTE: You can select one or more ThinOS application packages simultaneously.
6. Click Save & Publish .
The thin client restarts and the application packages are installed.
Firmware installation using Dell Wyse USB Imaging
Tool
Use the Dell Wyse USB Imaging Tool version 3.4.0 to install the ThinOS 9.1 Merlin image on your thin client. For information about installation instructions, see the Dell Wyse USB Imaging Tool version 3.4.0 User's Guide .
Upgrade BIOS
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have downloaded the BIOS file from Dell.com/support to your device.
● Ensure that you have registered the thin client to Wyse Management Suite, if you are upgrading BIOS using Wyse
Management Suite.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on the thin client or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Configuration Control | ThinOS window, click the Advanced tab.
3. Expand Firmware and click BIOS Firmware Updates .
4. Click Browse and select the BIOS file to upload.
5. From the Select the ThinOS BIOS to deploy drop-down list, select the BIOS file that you have uploaded.
6. Click Save & Publish .
The thin client restarts. BIOS is upgraded on your device.
NOTE: When you use the BIOS upgrade feature for the first time, the BIOS is downloaded even if the existing BIOS version is the same version that is uploaded.
If you are upgrading BIOS on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client, ensure that you have connected the device to the external power source using the power adapter. If you do not connect the power adapter, BIOS update fails. In this event, you cannot upgrade BIOS even after you connect the power adapter. As a workaround, do the following: a. Install a different version of the BIOS.
NOTE: A different version of the BIOS package may also fail to install. But, the installation status does not matter.
You can continue to the next step regardless of the result.
b. Connect the device to the external power source using the power adapter.
c. Upgrade BIOS to the latest version.
Edit BIOS settings
Prerequisites
● If you are using Wyse Management Suite, ensure that you have registered the thin client and synchronize the BIOS admin password. For more information about using the Sync BIOS Admin Password option, see the Dell Wyse Management Suite v2.1 Administrator's Guide at www.dell.com/support .
20 Upgrading the ThinOS firmware
● If you are using the Admin Policy Tool, ensure that you enter the current BIOS admin password in the Advanced > BIOS section.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on the thin client or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. In the Configuration Control | ThinOS window, click the Advanced tab.
3. Expand BIOS and select your preferred platform.
4. In the System Configuration section, modify the USB ports and audio settings.
5. In the Security section, modify the administrator-related configurations.
6. In the Secure Boot section, enable the secure boot option. If enabled, you cannot disable it using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse
Management Suite. Secure Boot can be disabled only in the BIOS setup window.
7. In the Power Management section, modify the power-saving options.
8. In the POST Behavior section, enable or disable the MAC Address Pass-Through feature. This option is applicable only to the Wyse 5470 Thin Client.
9. Click Save & Publish
NOTE: If the thin client does not have a BIOS admin password, you can set the password using Admin Policy Tool or
Wyse Management Suite. In this scenario, the client reboots first to apply the BIOS admin password and other BIOS settings take effect after the second reboot.
Delete ThinOS application packages
You can use the ThinOS local UI or the Wyse Management Suite to delete one or more ThinOS packages.
About this task
This section describes steps to delete ThinOS packages using the ThinOS local UI.
Steps
1. Log in to the ThinOS client.
2. From the system menu, go to System Tools > Packages .
All the installed ThinOS packages are listed.
3. Select a package that you want to delete and click Delete .
NOTE: To delete all the packages, click Delete all.
4. Click OK to save your settings.
For information about how to delete packages using Wyse Management Suite, see the latest Dell Wyse Management Suite
Administrator's Guide at www.dell.com/support .
Upgrading the ThinOS firmware 21
3
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
This chapter helps you to quickly learn the basics and get started with your ThinOS 9.1-based thin client.
End User License Agreement
End User License Agreement (EULA) is added to ThinOS. EULAs must be read and accepted to continue using ThinOS. By default, Dell EULA and HID EULA are added to ThinOS. The third-party EULAs are displayed on the EULA screen depending on the ThinOS application packages that you install on the thin client.
The EULA screen is displayed during the following instances:
● When you boot the thin client for the first time.
● When you reset a thin client that runs ThinOS 9.x to factory settings.
Configure ThinOS using First Boot Wizard
A First Boot Wizard application runs the first time when you start a thin client with ThinOS. The thin client starts the First
Boot Wizard application before you enter the ThinOS desktop. Use this application to perform tasks, such as, configuring system preferences, setting up the Internet connectivity, loading USB configurations, configuring management software, and configuring broker connections.
Prerequisites
If you are an existing thin client user, and you have upgraded to the ThinOS version 9.x, reset your thin client to factory default settings to enter the First Boot Wizard.
NOTE: If DHCP contains the Wyse Management Suite configurations, the ThinOS desktop is loaded without entering the
First Boot Wizard and you cannot view the End User License Agreement.
About this task
This section describes how to configure ThinOS using First Boot Wizard.
Steps
1. Connect your thin client to an Ethernet using a wired connection.
NOTE: If you want to use a wireless connection, you can connect to Wi-Fi on the How do You Connect?
screen at a later stage.
2. Turn on your thin client.
The thin client checks for a wired network connection. If the network connection is successful, a welcome screen is displayed followed by the EULA screen. For more information about the EULA screen, see
.
NOTE: If there is no network connection, press Continue on the welcome screen to go to the EULA screen.
22 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Figure 1. Welcome screen
3. Click Dell EULA or HID EULA from the right pane to read the respective EULAs. If you have installed the ThinOS application packages, ensure that you read the respective EULAs of the third-party applications.
NOTE: The EULA screen may different depending on the client installed pkgs.
Figure 2. EULA screen
4. Select the Click here to accept all EULAs check box and click Accept .
5. On the Select Your Language screen, select a language from the Language drop-down list to start ThinOS in the regional language.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
23
Figure 3. Select Your Language
6. Click .
7. On the Select Your Keyboard screen, select a keyboard layout from the list.
Figure 4. Select Your Keyboard
8. Click .
9. On the Select Your Time Zone screen, select a time zone from the list to set the time zone for your thin client.
The time server with IP addresses or host names is also displayed.
24 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Figure 5. Select Your Time Zone
10. Click .
11. On the How do You Connect?
screen, do either of the following:
● Local network (Ethernet) —Click this option if you have connected the thin client to an Ethernet using a wired connection.
● Wi-Fi Network —Click this option if you want to select a wireless network. From the list, select a wireless network, and click Connect .
NOTE: The option to define a wireless connection is not available on thin clients without a WLAN module.
● My computer does not connect to the Internet —Click this option if you do not want to establish a network connection using the First Boot Wizard screen. You can connect to either wired or wireless connection after you boot to the ThinOS desktop.
Figure 6. How do You Connect?
12. Click .
13. On the How would you like to import your ThinOS configurations?
screen, do either of the following:
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
25
● From Wyse Management Suite —Click this option if you want to use Wyse Management Suite to manage your thin clients.
To register your thin client to Wyse Management Suite, enter the group registration key and the Wyse Management Suite server URL. Select the CA validation check box if you want to enable the CA validation feature. The CA validation is required when you import certificates into your Wyse Management Suite server. By default, the CA Validation check box is selected to improve the security when using the Wyse Management Suite cloud.
● From USB —Click this option if you want to import system settings from the USB drive.
● Do not import a configuration —Click this option if you do not want to import any ThinOS configurations using the
First Boot Wizard screen.
Figure 7. How would you like to import your ThinOS configurations?
14. Click .
15. On the Connect to VDI broker screen, configure your preferred broker type from the following options:
● Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops
● VMware Horizon
● Windows Virtual Desktop
● Microsoft Remote Desktop Services
● Amazon WorkSpaces
● Teradici Cloud Access
26 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Figure 8. Connect to VDI broker
16. Click .
The Done screen is displayed.
Figure 9. Done
The device exists from the First Boot Wizard mode, and the ThinOS desktop is displayed.
Configure account privileges for ThinOS
Account privilege is used to control the user permission to access Admin Policy Tool and System Menu options. You can change a user privilege to High , Customize , or None from the Admin Policy Tool or the Wyse Management Suite console. When you set the user privilege to Customize , you can manually select and enable or disable the options in the ThinOS system menu.
The Administrator Mode menu in the Admin Policy Tool is disabled by default. You can enable the administrator mode in the
Admin Policy Tool or the Wyse Management Suite server, and configure an Administrator username and password.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
27
Configure account privileges using Admin Policy Tool
About this task
This section describes how to configure account privileges using Admin Policy Tool.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Admin Policy Tool .
The Configuration Control || ThinOS window is displayed.
2. Click the Standard tab or the Advanced tab.
3. Expand Privacy & Security .
4. Click Account Privileges .
5. Click the Enable Admin Mode slider switch if you want to enable the Administrator mode. When enabled, you must specify the Admin username and password.
6. From the Privilege Level drop-down list, select a privilege level— None , Customize , or High .
When you set the user privilege to Customize , you can manually select options that you want to enable or disable in the
ThinOS system menu. From ThinOS 9.1.2101 onwards, Add Connection , Global Connection Settings , and DHCP options are added. The DHCP option is only available after you enable Network Setup .
7. Click Save & Publish .
Configure account privileges using Wyse Management Suite
About this task
This section describes how to configure account privileges using Wyse Management Suite.
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs tab and select your desired group.
2. Click Edit Policies .
3. Select ThinOS 9.x
from the drop down list.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
4. Click the Standard tab or the Advanced tab .
5. Expand Privacy & Security .
6. Click Account Privileges .
7. Click the Enable Admin Mode slider switch if you want to enable the Administrator mode. When enabled, you must specify the Admin username and password.
8. From the Privilege Level drop-down list, select a privilege level— None , Customize , or High .
When you set the user privilege to Customize , you can manually select options that you want to enable or disable in the
ThinOS system menu.
9. Click Save & Publish .
Connect to a remote server
About this task
This section describes how to manually connect to a remote server.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Broker Setup tab and configure the respective VDI broker.
3. Click OK and restart the thin client.
28 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
After the thin client restarts, the Login dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the username, password, and domain.
After authentication is successful, your desktop is presented with your assigned connection that is defined by the broker server.
Connecting a display
Depending on your thin client model, connections to displays can be made using VGA (analog) port, DisplayPort (digital), Mini
DisplayPort, USB Type-C port, HDMI, and the proper Dell monitor cables/splitters/adapters.
For more information about ports and connectors, see the hardware documentation of the respective thin clients.
Connecting a printer
To connect a local printer to your thin client, ensure that you obtain and use the correct adapter cables. Before use, you may need to install the driver for the printer by following the printer driver installation instructions. For information about connecting to a printer, see
.
Desktop overview
ThinOS boots to the modern desktop screen. This is the default screen that is displayed after you log in to the thin client— without autostart of any connections or applications.
NOTE: When you upgrade from ThinOS 9.0 to 9.1, the device boots to the classic desktop screen by default.
Figure 10. Modern desktop
The ThinOS modern desktop consists of the following screen elements:
● Floatbar or taskbar —Contains the system tray area that displays the system icons.
● Broker login window —Enables you to log in to the Broker agent session using your login credentials.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
29
Modern interactive desktop features
The modern desktop mode (formerly zero desktop) has a Dell default background with the floating toolbar or floatbar on the screen.
NOTE: Citrix Workspace mode is not supported on the modern desktop.
Table 7. Modern desktop shortcuts
Action
Open a selection box for toggling between the desktop and currently-active connections
Lock the thin client
Press
Ctrl+Alt+DownArrow
Capture the full desktop to the clipboard
Capture the active window to the clipboard
Ctrl+Alt+LeftArrow or
Ctrl+Alt+RightArrow
Print Screen
Alt+PrintScreen
Enable modern desktop mode
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite or the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS.
2. Click the Advanced tab and expand Personalization .
3. Click User Experience Settings .
4. From the System Mode drop-down list, select Modern .
5. From the Show Floatbar when mouse drop-down list, select the way that you want to show floatbar when it is hidden.
6. From the Floatbar Location on Screen drop-down list, select the location of floatbar on the screen.
7. In the Screen ID field, enter the Screen ID on which floatbar should be shown. You must enter a number 0 to 6. 0 specifies the main screen.
8. Click Save & Publish .
Modern toolbar or float bar
The modern toolbar or float bar appears at the left or right corner of the modern desktop. However, depending on administrator configurations, the float bar can be removed or hidden. The toolbar is displayed when a user moves the mouse pointer over the left or right edge of the desktop screen.
NOTE: If you set the Show Floatbar option to Fly Over on either Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite, you must quickly move the mouse pointer on the desktop.
NOTE: If you set the Show Floatbar when mouse option to Delay and the Delay Floatbar Activation in
Millionseconds to 0, the modern float bar is disabled in a full screen session. If you press Ctrl+Alt+down key combination to switch to the ThinOS desktop, the float bar is not displayed. You must press the Windows key using your keyboard to view the float bar. If you change the mouse pointer size to a number greater than 3 in a Blast session, you must use Ctrl+Alt to exit the session and view the floating bar on the ThinOS modern desktop.
Table 8. Toolbar icons
Icon
VDI menu
System Info
Settings
Description
Opens the list of available connections.
Displays thin client system information.
Opens the System Settings menu to configure thin client system settings and perform diagnostics.
30 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Table 8. Toolbar icons (continued)
Icon
Shutdown
Description
Click the Shutdown Terminal con to use the Shutdown options available on the thin client.
Wireless network
Wired network
Volume or Sound
PNA menu
Displays the wireless connection mode. Clicking the wireless icon displays the SSID scan list.
You can directly connect to your preferred WiFi.
Displays the wired connected mode.
Click this icon to increase or decrease the speaker volume or mute the speaker.
Displays the Citrix connection options such as Refresh, Disconnect, Reconnect, Logoff, and
Manage Security Question.
NOTE: The PNA menu button is displayed only after you log in to the Citrix Broker agent.
PCoIP
Battery indicator
Smart Card Self-Service
Displays the active PCoIP sessions. This icon is applicable only for PCoIP-enabled clients. You can select a session from the menu, and enable or disable the following PCoIP options in real time:
● Relative Mouse
● Audio or Video synchronization
Hover over the battery indicator to view the remaining battery percentage. This option is applicable only to the Wyse 5470 Thin Client.
Click this icon to open the smart card self service window. You can use this window to view the smart card details, change PIN, and unlock PIN. This icon is displayed when you connect a smart card reader to the ThinOS client.
List of connections
On the modern toolbar, you can click the VDI menu icon to open your list of assigned connections and published applications.
Sometimes, the list contains only default connections.
NOTE: The connection options may be available for use, depending on the user privileges.
Table 9. Connection options
Option
Name of the connection
Gear icon
Add Connection
Global Connection Settings
Search bar
Description
Opens the connection you want to use.
Displays the sub menu.
Allows you to configure or add new connections.
Use the Global Connection Settings dialog box to configure settings that affect all the connection in the list.
Enables you to search for a particular connection from the list.
Classic desktop features
This section includes information about desktop guidelines, shortcut menu, desktop menu, and Connection Manager.
Desktop guidelines
The classic desktop has a Dell Wyse default background with a horizontal taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
31
Figure 11. Classic desktop
Use the following guidelines:
● Icons representing available server connections and published applications are displayed on the desktop. If you pause the mouse pointer over an icon, the information about the connection is displayed. Right-click an icon to open the Connection
Settings dialog box that displays additional information about the connection. The number of icons that can be displayed on the desktop depends on the desktop resolution and administrator configuration.
● A server connection and published application can be opened by double-clicking a desktop icon. You can also go to the desktop icon by using the tab key and press Enter to initiate the connection.
● Right-clicking on the desktop provides a shortcut menu .
● Clicking the desktop menu button, or clicking anywhere on the desktop, opens the desktop menu.
Enable classic desktop mode
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite or the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS.
2. Click the Advanced tab and expand Personalization .
3. Click User Experience Settings .
4. From the System Mode drop-down list, select Classic .
5. Click Save & Publish .
Using the taskbar
Use the taskbar to view the date, time, system information, wireless information, volume icon, PNAmenu button, and switch to the desktop screen.
32 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Figure 12. Taskbar
1.
System Information
2.
Volume or Sound
3.
Battery
4.
Wireless network
5.
Wired network
6.
Smart card self-service
7.
Citrix PNA menu
8.
Date and time
9.
Show desktop
The following table lists the taskbar elements:
Table 10. Taskbar - System tray elements
Element Description
Date and time Displays the date and time.
Battery
Show desktop
Volume or Sound
System Information
Wireless icon
Wired icon
Citrix PNA menu
Displays the battery percentage. This option is applicable for Wyse 5470 Thin
Client.
Click this icon to hide or restore VDI sessions.
Click this icon to increase or decrease the speaker volume or mute the speaker.
Click this icon to view the system information such as general system details, copyright, event logs, Wyse Management Suite status, network connections, and so on.
Displays the wireless connection mode. Clicking the wireless icon displays the SSID scan list. You can directly connect to your preferred WiFi.
Displays the wired connected mode.
Click this icon to use the following options:
● Refresh
● Disconnect
● Reconnect
● Logoff
● Manage Security Question—This option is available when you enable SSPR at the server end.
NOTE: The PNA menu button is displayed only after you log in to the Citrix broker.
Smart card self service
PCoIP
Click this icon to open the smart card self service window. You can use this window to view the smart card details, change PIN, and unlock PIN. This icon is displayed when you connect a smart card reader to the ThinOS client.
Click this icon to view the active PCoIP sessions. This icon is applicable only for
PCoIP-enabled clients. You can select a session from the menu, and enable or disable the following PCoIP options in real-time:
● Relative Mouse
● Audio/Video synchronization
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
33
Taskbar icons are added for all ThinOS windows except the login window and the Admin Policy Tool window. You can use the taskbar icons to minimize and restore the windows.
Table 11. Taskbar - ThinOS local windows icons
Element
Network Setup
Taskbar icon
Remote Connections
Central Configuration
VPN Manager
System Preferences
Display
Peripherals
Printer
System Information
System Tools
Troubleshooting
Connection Manager
Using the shortcut menu
About this task
This section describes how to use the shortcut menu on your thin client.
Steps
1. Right-click on your desktop.
The shortcut menu is displayed.
2. On the shortcut menu, you can view and use the following options: a.
Administrator Mode —Lets you enter the administrator mode. This option is disabled by default. You must enable the option from Wyse Management Suite server or Admin Policy Tool.
b.
Hide all windows —Brings the full desktop to the foreground.
c.
Copy to clipboard —Copies an image of the full screen, current window, or event log to the clipboard. The clipboard contents can be pasted to an Independent Computing Architecture (ICA) session. You can copy the full screen or current window to clipboard, and can export the screenshots using the Export Screenshot option in the Troubleshooting dialog box.
d.
Purge clipboard —Discards the contents of the clipboard to free up memory. If there are no contents in the clipboard, the Purge clipboard option is disabled.
e.
Lock Terminal —Puts the thin client in a locked state when the user has logged in to the system with a password. The thin client can only be unlocked using the same password.
f.
Performance Monitor —Opens the performance monitor.
34 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Using the desktop menu
About this task
This section describes how to use the desktop menu on your thin client.
Steps
1. Click or click anywhere on your desktop.
The desktop menu is displayed.
2. On the desktop menu, use the following options to configure the thin client:
● System Setup —Provides access to the following local system setup dialog boxes:
○ Network Setup —Allows selection of DHCP or manual entry of network settings, and server locations.
○ Remote Connections —Allows you to configure the Broker agent connection.
○ Central Configuration —Allows you to configure the Wyse Management Suite server settings.
○ VPN Manager —Allows you to configure the VPN connection.
○ System Preferences —Allows you to configure general settings such as screensaver, locale, and time and date.
○ Display —Allows you to configure the monitor resolution and rotation.
○ Peripherals —Allows you to select the peripherals settings such as audio, keyboard, mouse, serial, camera, and
Bluetooth settings.
○ Printer Setup —Allows you to configure network printers and local printers that are connected to the thin client.
○ Admin Policy Tool —Allows you to configure all the ThinOS settings similar to configuring settings using Wyse
Management Suite.
● System Information —Provides the device information.
● System Tools —Provides information about devices, certificates, and packages.
● Troubleshooting —Displays the performance monitor graphs, trace and event log settings, and other options that are useful for troubleshooting your thin client.
● Shutdown —Allows you to shut down the system, or restart the operating system.
Configure the Connection Manager
The Connection Manager has a list of connection entries and command buttons available for use with the connections.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Connection Manager settings.
Steps
1. Go to System Setup > Remote Connections , and configure the Broker agent setup.
2. Log in to the Broker agent connection.
3. On the taskbar, click .
The Connection Manager dialog box is displayed.
NOTE: Nonprivileged users cannot view the Connection Manager.
4. In the Connection Manager dialog box, and use the following guidelines:
● Select a connection from the list, and click Connect to establish the VDI connection.
● Click Properties to open the Connection Settings dialog box for the selected connection.
All users can view and edit definitions for the selected connection. Edits are not permanently retained when the user signs-off.
● Click Sign-off to log off from the thin client.
● If you want to reset a selected virtual connection, select a connection from the list, and click Reset VM .
● Click the Global Connection Settings tab to open and configure settings that affect all the connections available in the list.
● Click Add to create an RDP or a PCoIP connection.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
35
● Click Delete to remove the created connection from the list.
Configuring thin client settings and connection broker settings
You can either use the ThinOS local UI or the Wyse Management Suite to do the following:
● Set up your thin client hardware, look and feel, and system settings
○
For configuring these settings using ThinOS local UI, see Configuring connectivity
and
Configure the thin client local settings
.
○ For configuring these settings using Wyse Management Suite, see
Edit the ThinOS 9.x policy settings
.
● Configure the connection broker settings
○
For configuring these settings using ThinOS local UI, see Configuring the connection brokers
.
○ For configuring these settings using Wyse Management Suite, see
Edit the ThinOS 9.x policy settings
.
Configure ThinOS using Admin Policy Tool
ThinOS 9.x does not support FTP, HTTP, HTTPS file server, and INI parameter settings. You can configure these settings using a local management tool called Admin Policy Tool.
NOTE: After you reset the thin client to factory default settings, the device starts the First Boot Wizard application by default. You can use the Admin Policy Tool to change the default settings for First Boot Wizard.
Configure the Admin Policy Tool
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Admin Policy Tool .
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
2. Click the Standard tab or the Advanced tab.
The Standard tab lists all the common settings. The Advanced tab lists all the advanced settings.
3. Expand the options that you want to configure.
4. In the respective fields, click the option that you want to configure.
5. Click Save & Publish .
Admin Policy Tool feature list
The following table displays the list of features that are supported by the Admin Policy Tool in ThinOS 9.1.
Table 12. Admin Policy Tool
Feature
Region & Language
Settings
Subfeature Restart required
Region & Language No
Privacy & Security
Privacy & Security
Privacy & Security
Privacy & Security
Privacy & Security
Broker Settings
Account Privileges
Certificates
Security Policy
SCEP
Device Security
Global Broker
Settings
No
No
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
36 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Table 12. Admin Policy Tool (continued)
Feature
Broker Settings
Subfeature
Citrix Broker
Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Login Experience
Login Experience
Login Experience
Login Experience
Personalization
Personalization
Personalization
Personalization
Personalization
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Peripheral Management
Restart required
No
VMware Broker
Settings
Windows Virtual
Desktop Settings
Microsoft Remote
Desktop Settings
Amazon WorkSpaces
Settings
Teradici Cloud
Access Settings
Global Session
Settings
Citrix Session
Settings
Blast Session
Settings
PCoIP Session
Settings
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
RDP and WVD
Session Settings
3rd Party
Authentication
No
No
Smart card Settings Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Login Settings
Session Settings
Shortcut Keys
No
No
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Device Info
Desktop
Screen Saver
User Experience
Settings
RFIdeas Reader
Printers
Audio
Touch
No
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
No
No
No
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
Serial Port
USB Redirection
Monitor
Mouse
Keyboard
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
No
No
No
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
37
Table 12. Admin Policy Tool (continued)
Feature
Peripheral Management
Subfeature
Device Headset
Settings
Peripheral Management
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
System Settings
System Settings
System Settings
System Settings
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
Services
Services
Services
BIOS
BIOS
BIOS
BIOS
Restart required
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
CCID
OS Firmware
Updates
Application Package
Updates
BIOS Firmware
Updates
Power and Sleep
Settings
Scheduled Reboot
Settings
Scheduled Shutdown
Settings
Device Settings
Ethernet Settings
DHCP Settings
DNS Settings
VPN Settings
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Bluetooth Settings
Proxy Settings
Wireless
Common Settings
VNC Service
WMS Settings
Troubleshooting
Settings
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
No
Captive Portal requires a reboot to take effect.
No
No
No
No
Dell Wyse 3040
Dell Wyse 5070
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Dell Wyse 5470 Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Dell Wyse 5470 AIO Yes, you must restart the client for all changes to take effect.
Important information
● If you are using the Device Security Allow List Policy setting, you must first specify Hub, HID in the Class field by adding a row in Advanced > Device Security section in Admin Policy Tool. If you do not add Hub, HID to the Allow list, all USB devices are inaccessible when connected to the thin client. You must restart the thin client for changes to take effect.
● It is not recommended to set Vendor and Product ID and Class simultaneously in one row. However, if you configure both options simultaneously, the device first checks the Vendor and Product ID followed by the Class list.
● When you configure the Bluetooth, VNCD server, Bluetooth, VNC Server, NetID License, Serial Port, and Device Security settings using the Admin Policy Tool, ensure that you restart the thin client for the settings to take effect.
38 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Locking the thin client
ThinOS enables you to lock your thin client so that credentials are required to unlock and use the thin client again.
Shut down and restart
About this task
This section describes how to use the Shutdown dialog box to either shut down the system or restart the system.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click Shutdown .
The shutdown dialog box is displayed.
2. Click any of the following options:
● Shutdown the system —Enables you to shut down the system.
● Restart the system —Enables you to restart the operating system.
3. Click OK to save settings.
Battery information
This section is applicable to the Wyse 5470 Thin Client. The battery indicator is displayed on the system tray.
The following table contains the battery indicators:
Table 13. Battery indicators
Battery status
While charging with the AC adapter
Icon
Battery 90% - 100% without connecting the AC adapter
Battery 50% - 89% without connecting the AC adapter
Battery 25% - 49% without connecting the AC adapter
Battery 9% - 24% without connecting the AC adapter
Battery 0% - 8% without connecting the AC adapter
● When the battery is lower than 12%, a notification is displayed at the right-bottom with the remaining percentage.
● Plugging in the AC adapter to charge the device increases brightness by 10% and disconnecting the AC adapter decreases brightness by 10%.
● By default, the critical battery level is 5%. When the battery reaches the critical level, ThinOS is turned off automatically.
You must plug in the AC power to power on the thin client.
Login dialog box features
The Login dialog box enables you to do the following tasks:
● Log in broker to the configured server connection.
● Change or reset your own password, and unlock your account.
● Open the Shutdown dialog box by using Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
39
NOTE: Ctrl+Alt+Delete is disabled by default and you can enable it from the Wyse Management Suite server. If enabled,
Ctrl+Alt+Delete locks terminal and triggers the lock window.
View the system information
Use the System Information dialog box to view the system information. You can either click System Information from the desktop menu or the System Information icon on the taskbar.
The System Information dialog box includes the following elements:
● General tab —Displays the following information:
○ System version
○ Terminal name
○ Serial number
○ System Up Time
○ Memory size
○ Memory Usage
○ CPU Speed
○ CPU Utilization
○ Monitor
○ Resolution
○ Parallel ports
○ Serial ports
○ Battery—Wyse 5470 Thin Client only
○ Remaining time—Wyse 5470 Thin Client only
● Copyright tab —Displays the software copyright and patent notices.
Click the Acknowledgments button to view the information that is related to third-party software.
● Event Log tab —Displays the thin client start-up steps beginning from system version to checking firmware or error messages that are helpful for debugging issues. The number of displays and USB devices that are connected to the thin client, and the Bluetooth initialization are also displayed.
● ENET tab —Displays information about wired network connections.
● WLAN tab —Displays information about wireless network connections.
● About tab —Displays the following information:
○ Platform name
○ Operating system
○ Build name
○ Build version
○ BIOS name
○ BIOS version
○ Citrix Workspace App version
○ Teradici PCoIP
○ VMware Horizon
○ WVD
○ WMS status
○ MQTT server
NOTE:
○ Kernel mode —The components are implemented in Kernel according to the specification. The version is displayed as [max].[min], which is the base version of protocol or server or client of the component.
○ User mode —The components are from the source, or binaries from third-party software that are compiled or integrated into the ThinOS operating system. The version is displayed as [max].[min].[svn_revision]. The [max] and
[min] is the base version of the third component, and the [svn_revision] is the source control revision of ThinOS.
Using the ThinOS specified version, you can identify the changes between different revisions. For example, the Citrix
Workspace App version is 19.12.0.19. The components are matched to the installed packages. If the packages are removed, the field remains empty in the About tab.
40 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
Sleep mode
The sleep mode enables the power-saving state and quickly resumes full power operations without loss of data.
The sleep mode feature is supported on the following platforms:
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
The USB interface is closed in sleep mode. All USB devices such as USB drives, Bluetooth, audio devices, video devices, and camera are reinitialized after resuming from sleep mode.
The wired network, wireless network, and VPN are disconnected in sleep mode. However, the network configurations are saved.
All the ThinOS configurations—VDI configuration, network configuration, and so on—are saved automatically in sleep mode. If you are signed on to broker agent, all the windows are closed automatically and signed off when entering sleep mode. If you are not signed on to broker agent, the windows are not closed when entering sleep mode.
Enable sleep manually
To enable the Sleep option manually, use either of the following options:
● ThinOS lock window —To enter sleep mode using the ThinOS lock window, do the following:
1. Lock your thin client.
2. In the ThinOS lock window, click Sleep .
3. Click OK .
● Shutdown dialog box —To enter sleep mode using the Shutdown dialog box, do the following:
1. Open the Shutdown window.
2. Click Sleep , and then click OK .
You can wake the thin client from sleep mode by pressing the power button, any key on the keyboard, or by clicking the mouse button. To use the USB keyboard or mouse to wake your thin client, you must enable wake on USB in BIOS.
Wyse 5470 Thin Client —The AC power must be connected to wake the Wyse 5470 Thin Client using the USB keyboard or mouse. You can also wake the Wyse 5470 Thin Client by opening the lid.
Import certificates to ThinOS from Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on your thin client or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Configuration Control | ThinOS window, click the Advanced tab.
3. Expand Privacy & Security , and click Certificates .
4. Click the Auto Install Certificates slider switch to enable autoinstall of certificates on ThinOS.
5. Browse and select the certificate that you want to upload.
NOTE: Admin Policy Tool supports the .cer
, .crt
, .pfx
, .der
, and .pem
certificate file types. Wyse Management
Suite supports .cer
, .crt
, .pfx
, .der
, and .pem
certificate file types.
6. From the Select Certificates to Upload drop-down list, select the certificate that you have uploaded.
7. Click Save & Publish .
The certificate is installed on your thin client.
ThinOS system variables
ThinOS uses system variables or part of a system variable when defining command values. System variables are often used to define unique values for fields such as terminal name or default user. For example, if the client has an IP address
Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
41
123.123.123.022, ACC&Right($FIP,3) results in a value of ACC022. Using system variables makes it easier to manage groups of devices that require a unique terminal name or default user.
The following are the ThinOS system variables:
Table 14. ThinOS system variables
Variable Description
$IP IP address
$IPOCT4
The fourth octet of IP Address. For example, if IP is 10.151.120.15, the value is 15.
$UN
Sign-on username
$DN Sign-on domain name
$DHCP (extra_dhcp_option)
$MAC
$CMAC
$UMAC
$TN
$SUBNET
$FIP
$SN
$VN
Right($xx, i) or and Left($xx, i)
Extra DHCP options for Windows CE unit, including 169, 140, 141, 166, 167.
For example, set a string test169 for option tag 169 in DHCP server, and set
TerminalName=$DHCP(169) in the Wyse Management Suite server. After the thin client checks in to the Wyse Management Suite server, check the terminal name in GUI, and the terminal name is changed to test169. 166 and 167 is default for CCM MQTT Server and CCM CA Validation in ThinOS. So you need to remap the options from GUI if you want to use $DHCP(166)/ $DHCP(167).
MAC address
MAC address with colon
MAC address with uppercase letters is used.
Terminal name
Subnet notation, the format is {network_address}_{network_mask_bits} For example, if the ip address is 10.151.120.15, network mask is 255.255.255.0, 10.151.120.0_24 is used.
IP Address with xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, for example,123.123.123.022
Serial number
Version number
Specifies that the variable is to be read from left or right. The $xx is any of above parameters and the parameter i specifies the digits for the offset of right or left.
42 Getting started with ThinOS 9.1
4
Configuring the global connection settings
About this task
This section describes how to use the Global Connection Settings dialog box to configure the connection settings for ICA,
Horizon, RDP and PCoIP.
Steps
1. Configure the Broker agent connection on ThinOS. See,
2. On the desktop taskbar, click
( Connection Manager ) and then click Global Connection Settings .
The Global Connection Settings dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the Session tab and configure the following options:
● Settings common to all session —Select the check boxes to enable options that are applied to all sessions. The available options are:
○ Launch only once —Select the check box if you want the session to be launched only once at the same time.
○ Re-connect after disconnect —Select the check box if you want the session to launch again after the connection is disconnected.
○ Mount disks as read-only —Select the check box if you want to disable write access for storage disks.
○ Enable Imprivata VC —Select the check box if you want the Imprivata VC to be redirected to the remote session. If this option is not selected, RFIDEAS or Fingerprint reader can be redirected into the remote session.
● Auto connect to local devices —Select the check boxes to automatically connect to local devices, such as printers, serials, smart cards, audio devices, and disks at system startup.
If you want to use the Disks option to connect to sessions automatically, ensure that:
○ More than one disk can be used simultaneously. However, the maximum number of USB drives including different subareas is 12.
○ You save all data and sign off from the session before removing the USB drive.
● USB device redirection —Select this check box to allow USB devices to be redirected to the remote session. The available options are:
○ Exclude disk devices —Select the check box if you do not want disk devices to be redirected to the remote session.
○ Exclude printer devices —Select the check box if you do not want printer devices to be redirected to the remote session.
○ Exclude audio devices —Select the check box if you do not want audio devices to be redirected to the remote session.
○ Exclude video devices —Select the check box if you do not want video devices to be redirected to the remote session.
4. Click the ICA tab, and do the following: a. Select the check boxes to enable the options that are applied to all sessions. The available options are:
● Seamless window mode —Select this check box if you want to launch applications and desktops seamlessly.
● Desktop with fullscreen mode —Select this check box if you want to launch the desktop session in fullscreen.
● Enable HDX/MMR —Select the check box if you want to enable the Multimedia Redirection feature. When this option is enabled, the audio and video is rendered on the user device instead of the server.
● Enable session reliability —Select the check box if you want the session to remain active when the network connection is unstable.
● Enable UDP audio —Select the check box if you want the Citrix connections to use audio over User Datagram
Protocol (UDP).
b. From the Audio Quality drop-down list, select an audio quality optimized for your connection.
5. Click the Horizon tab, and select the check boxes to enable the options that are applied to all sessions. The available options are:
Configuring the global connection settings 43
● Allow H.264 decoding —Select the check box if you want to enable the H.264 decoding in Horizon Client. Enabling this option improves the performance of high-end applications. H.264 is disabled by default.
● Allow High Color Accuracy —Select the check box if you want to allow Horizon Client to use a superior color fidelity when H.264 decoding is enabled.
● Allow Blast to use the system proxy settings —Select the check box if you want Blast connections to use a proxy server.
6. Click the RDP tab, and do the following: a. Select the check boxes to enable the options that are applied to all sessions. The available options are:
● Enable NLA —Select the check box if you want to verify users before connecting to a full RDP connection.
● Force Span —Select the check box if you want to span the session horizontally across two displays. This option enables you to use two displays as one large display.
● Record from Local —Select the check box if you want to enable recording from a local microphone.
b. In the Desktop Scale Factor box, enter the DPI value in percentage. This option enables you to define the desktop
DPI remotely. The Desktop Scale Factor is only applicable for the RDP connection. Setting this option does not impact the display scale of the thin client locally. The DPI range is 100–500. If you enter a nonnumeric character, the value is automatically set to 100. If you enter a value less than 100, the value is automatically set to 100. If you enter a value higher than 500, the value is automatically set to 500
7. Click OK to save your settings.
44 Configuring the global connection settings
5
Configuring connectivity
This chapter helps you understand various configuration settings for a secure connection. To configure the settings on the classic desktop, click System Setup from the desktop menu, and use the configuration tabs.
Configuring the network settings
Use the network options to configure the network connection based on your requirement.
Configure the general settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the general network settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Network Setup .
The Network setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the General tab, and do the following:
Figure 13. General tab
NOTE: If network interfaces are in the same subnet, connection to the same subnet is prioritized last by the interface to fetch the IP address. Connections to the other subnets are prioritized in the order ENET0, ENET1, and WLAN.
a. To set a default gateway, select the type of network interface from the Select Network Interface as the Default
Gateway drop-down list.
ThinOS supports the dual IPv6 network interface. The following network combinations are supported:
● Wired connection 1 + Wireless connection 1
● Wired connection 1 + Wired connection 2
Configuring connectivity 45
NOTE:
The limitation of the dual network is that the device cannot automatically determine which connection to use among the two.
b.
Use Static Name Servers —By default, this check box is not selected, and the thin client fetches the server IP address from DHCP. To manually assign the static IP addresses, select the Use Static Name Servers check box and do the following:
NOTE: If name servers are changed, the details are displayed in event logs. In dynamic mode, the DNS can be merged from Ethernet and wireless, or from Ethernet 0 and Ethernet 1.
i.
Enter the URL address of the DNS domain in the DNS Domain field.
ii. Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the DNS Server field.
However, the use of DNS is optional. DNS enables you to specify remote systems by their host names rather than IP addresses. If a specific IP address (instead of a name) is entered for a connection, it is used to make the connection.
Ensure that you use the DNS domain and the network address of an available DNS server. The function of the DNS domain entry is to provide a default suffix that is used to resolve the name. The values for these two fields may be supplied by a DHCP server. If the DHCP server supplies these values, they replace any locally configured values. If the
DHCP server does not supply these values, the locally configured values are used.
On ThinOS, error tips are displayed when you set an invalid DNS server. A window with the error message is displayed when you click save the invalid DNS server.
NOTE: You can enter the server addresses, each separated by a semicolon. The character limit is 256. The first address is for the primary DNS server, and the rest are secondary DNS servers or backup DNS servers.
c. Enter the IP address of the WINS server in the WINS Server field.
NOTE: Only one WINS server is supported.
However, the use of WINS is optional. You must specify the network address of an available WINS name server. WINS enables you to specify remote systems by their host names rather than IP addresses. If a specific IP address (instead of a name) is entered for a connection, it is used to make the connection. These entries can be supplied through DHCP, if
DHCP is used. DNS and WINS provide essentially the same name resolution. If both DNS and WINS are available, the thin client attempts to resolve the name using DNS first and then WINS. You can enter a single WINS Server address.
d. Enter the digit multiplier of 30 s in the TCP Timeout box to set the time-out value of a TCP connection. The value must be either 1 or 2 which means the connection time-out value is from 1 x 30 = 30 s to 2 x 30 = 60 s. Setting the time-out period retransmits the sent data and tries to connect to the server again until the connection is established.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the DHCP options settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the DHCP options settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Network setup .
The Network setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Options tab, and do the following:
46 Configuring connectivity
Figure 14. Options tab a.
Interpret DHCP Option IDs —Enter the supported DHCP options. Each value can only be used one time.
Table 15. DHCP option tags
Option
165
Description Additional information
Wyse Management Suite server Optional string. Specifies the IP address of the Wyse Management Suite server.
166 Optional string. Specifies the IP address of the MQTT server.
167
181
Wyse Management Suite MQTT server
Wyse Management Suite CA
Validation
PNAgent/ PNLite server list
Optional string. Specifies the CA validation.
182
199
NT domain list for PNAgent/
PNLite
Wyse Management Suite group registration key
Optional string. The thin client uses the server to authenticate the credentials of the user. The device obtains a list of ICA published applications valid for the validated credentials. The user supplies those credentials when logging in to the thin client.
Optional string. The thin client creates a drop-down list of domains from the information that is supplied in the option tag. The list is available during thin client login in the order that is specified in the DHCP option.
For example, the first domain that is specified becomes the default option. The selected domain is the one which must authenticate the user
ID and password. Only the selected domain is used in the authentication process. If the domain list is incomplete and if the user credentials must be verified against a domain not in the list, you can type a different domain name during login. This is based on the assumption that the server in option 181 can authenticate against a domain that is not available in the list.
Optional string. Specifies a Wyse Management Suite group registration key for the Wyse Management Suite agent. When Wyse Management
Suite is disabled, and the group key of Wyse Management Suite is null, this option takes effect. Wyse Management Suite uses the optional string as the group registration key. If the Wyse Management Suite
Configuring connectivity 47
Table 15. DHCP option tags (continued)
Option Description Additional information server or the MQTT server is null, the Wyse Management Suite agent sets the values to the default server values.
b.
Interpret DHCP Vendor-Specific Info —Select this check box for automatic interpretation of the vendor information.
c.
DHCP Vendor ID —Displays the DHCP vendor ID when the Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP option is selected.
d.
DHCP UserClass ID —Displays the DHCP user class ID when the Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP option is selected.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
NOTE: The User Class option for DHCP standard is RFC 2132.
Configure the ENET settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Ethernet settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Network setup .
The Network setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the ENET tab, and do the following:
Figure 15. ENET tab a. From the Ethernet Select drop-down list, select a wired network connection.
48 Configuring connectivity
NOTE: For Wyse 5070 Thin Client without SFP or RJ45 module, the ENET0 option is selected by default. For
Wyse 5070 thin client with SFP or RJ45 module and Wyse 5470 Thin Client that is connected to Dell WD19 docking station, select either ENET0 or ENET1 based on your network preference.
b. From the Ethernet Speed drop-down list, select a value for the Ethernet speed. The default value is Auto-Detect . If your network equipment does not support the automatic negotiation, select any of the following values:
● 10 MB Half-Duplex
● 10 MB Full-Duplex
● 100 MB Half-Duplex
● 100 MB Full-Duplex
● 1000 MB Full-Duplex
NOTE: The 10 MB Full-Duplex value can be selected locally. However, this mode can be negotiated through
Auto-Detect .
c. Click the IPv4 button, and then click Properties to configure the following options:
● Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP —Select this option to enable your thin client to automatically receive information from the DHCP server. The network administrator must configure the DHCP server by using DHCP options to provide information. Any value that is entered locally in the Options tab is replaced by the DHCP value. If the DHCP server fails to provide replacement values, the locally entered value is used.
● Statically specified IP Address —Select this option to manually enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
○ IP Address —Enter a valid network address in the server environment. The network administrator must provide this information.
○ Subnet Mask —Enter the value of the subnet mask. A subnet mask is used to gain access to machines on other subnets. The subnet mask is used to differentiate the location of other IP addresses with two choices— same subnet or other subnet . If the location is a different subnet, messages that are sent to that address must be sent through the default gateway. This does not depend on the value that is specified through local configuration or through DHCP. The network administrator must provide this value.
○ Default Gateway —Use of gateways is optional. Gateways are used to interconnect multiple networks—routing or delivering IP packets between them. The default gateway is used for accessing the Internet or an intranet with multiple subnets. If no gateway is specified, the thin client can only address other systems on the same subnet.
Enter the address of the router that connects the thin client to the Internet. The address must exist on the same subnet as the thin client as defined by the IP address and the subnet mask. If DHCP is used, the address can be supplied through DHCP.
d. Click the IPv6 button, and on the Properties tab, configure the following options:
NOTE: The limitation of the dual IPv6 network is that the device cannot automatically determine which connection to use among the two.
● Select the Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP option to enable your thin client to automatically receive information from the DHCP server. The network administrator must configure the DHCP server (using DHCP options) to provide information. Any value that is entered locally in the Options tab is replaced by the DHCP value. If the
DHCP server fails to provide replacement values, the locally entered value is used.
● Select the Statically specified IP Address option to manually enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
○ IP Address —Enter a valid network address in the server environment. The network administrator must provide this information.
○ Subnet Prefix Len —Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 subnet.
○ Default gateway —Use of gateways is optional. For more information, see various IPv4-supported options in this section.
e. Select the Enable the IEEE 802.1x authentication check box, and from the EAP type drop-down list, select TLS ,
LEAP , PEAP or FAST .
● TLS —Select this option, and click Properties to configure the Authentication Properties dialog box.
○ Select the Validate Server Certificate check box because it is mandatory to validate your server certificate.
NOTE: The CA certificate must be installed on the thin client. The server certificate text field supports a maximum of approximately 255 characters, and supports multiple server names.
○ Select the Connect to these servers check box, and enter the IP address of the server.
○ Click Browse to find and select the client certificate file and the private key file you want.
NOTE: Ensure that you select the PFX file only.
Configuring connectivity 49
○ From the Authenticate drop-down list, select either user authentication or machine authentication that is based on your choice.
The following kinds of server names are supported—all examples are based on Cert Common name company.dell.com
:
￭ *.dell.com
￭ *dell.com
￭ *.com
NOTE: Using only the FQDN, that is, company.dell.com
does not work. Use one of the options, for example servername.dell.com
( *.dell.com
is the most common option as multiple authentication servers may exist).
● LEAP —Select this option, and click Properties to configure the Authentication Properties dialog box. Be sure to use the correct username and password for authentication. The maximum length for the username or the password is
31 characters.
● PEAP —Select this option, and click Properties to configure the Authentication Properties dialog box. Be sure to select either EAP_GTC or EAP_MSCHAPv2 , and then use the correct username, password, and domain. Validate
Server Certificate is optional.
● FAST —Select this option, and click Properties to configure the Authentication Properties dialog box. Be sure to select either EAP_GTC or EAP_MSCHAPv2 , and then use the correct username, password, and domain.
NOTE: During the initial connection with EAP-FAST, when there is a request for a Tunnel PAC from the authenticator, the PAC is used to complete the authentication. The first-time connection always fails, and the subsequent connections succeed. Only automatic PAC provisioning is supported. The user/machine PAC provisioning that is generated with CISCO EAP-FAST utility is not supported.
When EAP-MSCHAPV2 or EAP-GTC is selected for PEAP or FAST authentication, an option to hide the domain is available. Username and password boxes are available for use, but the domain text box is disabled. When EAP-
MSCHAPV2 or EAP-GTC is selected for PEAP or FAST authentication, a check box to enable the single sign-on feature is available.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the WLAN settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the wireless settings on your thin client.
NOTE: On the Wyse 5070 Thin Client with an optional SFP module or RJ45 module, you cannot configure the wireless settings.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Network setup .
The Network Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the WLAN tab, and configure the following options:
50 Configuring connectivity
Figure 16. WLAN tab
● Add —Use this option to add and configure a new SSID connection. You can configure the SSID connection from the available security type options. After you configure the SSID connection, the added SSID connection is listed on the
WLAN tab.
● Remove —Use this option to remove an SSID connection from the list.
● Scan —Use this option to allow your thin client to scan and identify a wireless network connection.
● Connect —Use this option to join a wireless network from the list.
● Properties —Use this option to view and configure the authentication properties of an SSID connection that is displayed in the list.
● IPv4 Config —Click this option to configure the IPv4 settings for the wireless connection.
To set IPv4 connection using either DHCP or static IP address, configure any one of the following options:
○ If you want to enable your thin client to automatically receive information from the DHCP server, click Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP .
○ If you want to manually configure the IP address, click Statically specified IP Address , and provide the IPv4 details.
● IPv6 Config —Click this option to configure the IPv6 settings for the wireless connection.
a. To enable the wireless IPv6, click the IPv6 slider switch.
b. To set IPv6 connection using either DHCP or static IP address, configure any one of the following options:
○ If you want to enable your thin client to automatically receive information from the DHCP server, click
Dynamically allocated over DHCP/BOOTP .
○ If you want to manually configure the IP address, click Statically specified IP Address , and provide the IPv6 details.
● Disable Wireless Device —Select this check box to disable a wireless device.
○ Always —Click this radio button if you want to keep the wireless options always disabled.
○ EnetUp —Click this radio button if you want to disable the wireless device whenever the wired network is connected.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
NOTE: If you have connected to Wi-Fi on a ThinOS device that is connected to the Dell WD19 docking station, you may not be able to connect to Wi-Fi again after the ThinOS firmware update is installed and your device is automatically restarted. To resolve this issue, you must restart the ThinOS client again.
Configuring connectivity 51
Enable captive portal detection for wireless
When you attempt to connect to WiFi, a web page is displayed to verify authenticated users before Internet access is granted.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. Click the Advanced tab and expand Network Configuration .
3. Click Wireless .
4. On the Global Wireless Settings page, click the Enable Captive Portal Detection toggle switch. Enabling this feature allows the ThinOS client to display the captive portal web page when you attempt to connect to WiFi.
5. In the Captive Portal Detection Interval Time field, specify the session timeout.
6. Click the Allow HTTP protocol redirection toggle switch if you want to use the HTTP protocol for redirecting to the captive portal web page.
7. Specify the captive portal detection URL. If the URL is not configured, the system default URL is used.
8. Restart your thin client for settings to take effect.
NOTE: If your thin client is connected to a wired network, you must set the default gateway to WLAN0 .
Configure the proxy settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the proxy settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Network setup .
The Network setup dialog box is displayed.
Table 16. Supported protocols
Component
Wyse Management Suite
Supported protocols
HTTP, HTTPS, and SOCKS5
Additional information
It is recommended to use the SOCKS5 protocol.
N/A Citrix RealTime Media Engine
(RTME)
Windows Virtual Desktop (WVD)
HTTP
HTTP N/A
Horizon HTTP N/A
2. Click the Proxy tab, and configure the following options:
● Proxy Types—You can use HTTP proxy, HTTPS proxy and SOCKS5 proxy types. The proxy type enables the thin client to connect to the application such as Wyse Management Suite.
● Proxy values—You can enter values for the HTTP proxy, HTTPS proxy and SOCKS5 proxy types. Adding proxy values enable the thin client to connect to the proxy server.
NOTE: In ThinOS 9.1.2101, a new app list value HORIZON is added. For the VMware Broker agent logon to use the proxy, you should specify the Apply proxy server on field as HORIZON . However, VMware Broker agent with tunnel enabled and VMware application can use proxy when you specify any value in the Apply proxy server on field.
52 Configuring connectivity
Figure 17. Proxy tab
Use the following guidelines: a. Configure the proxy servers based on your requirement.
● Enter the HTTP proxy port number or HTTPS proxy port number, username, and password in the respective fields.
However, credential pass through ($UN/$PW) is not recommended because it starts before user sign on.
Wyse Management Suite uses both HTTP/HTTPS and MQTT protocols to communicate with the WMS/MQTT server. However, the HTTP proxy cannot redirect TCP packages to the MQTT server which requires a SOCKS5 proxy server. If there is only the HTTP server available, the real-time command that requires MQTT does not work.
NOTE: The HTTP/HTTPS proxy default port is 808.
● Enter the SOCKS5 proxy port number, username, and password in the respective fields. If SOCKS5 proxy is configured, Wyse Management Suite proxy uses the SOCKS5 only. If SOCKS5 is not configured, then Wyse
Management Suite proxy searches for alternative protocols, for example, HTTP in the configuration.
NOTE: The SOCKS5 proxy default port is 1080.
● Select the Use the first proxy server for all protocols check box to enable all the protocols to use the same server in the HTTP Proxy fields. Both HTTP and HTTPS proxy use the same host and port, and SOCKS5 proxy agent uses HTTP host with default Socks5 port (1080).
b. Specify the supported applications as Wyse Management Suite, Windows Virtual Desktop (WVD), and RTME separated by a semicolon in the Apply proxy server on field.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
NOTE: ThinOS supports the usage of DHCP option tag 252. This option enables the device to fetch the proxy information from the DHCP server when the device is reset to factory default settings or when you restart the thin client. For example, http://x.x.x.x/proxy.pac
. The proxy settings from DHCP option 252 are not displayed on the ThinOS GUI.
Configuring connectivity 53
Table 17. VDI logon or session launch that goes through proxy
Component
Citrix
VMware
Windows Virtual Desktop
Microsoft Remote Desktop
Services
Amazon WorkSpaces
Teradici Cloud
Features http broker log in http broker session launch https broker log in https broker session launch broker log in session launch broker log in session launch broker log in session launch broker log in session launch broker log in session launch
Wyse Management Suite Wyse Management Suite connection
PAC proxy
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
GUI proxy
No
No
Yes (RTME value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
Yes (RTME value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
Yes (HORIZON value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
Yes (HORIZON value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
Yes (WVD value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes (WMS value added in the Apply proxy server on application list field)
User scenario
1. Configure the SOCKS5 proxy server host and port.
2. Configure the user credentials according to the proxy server settings.
After you restart your system, the client checks in to the Wyse Management Suite server through the SOCKS5 proxy server.
MQTT connection is established through the SOCKS5 proxy server. Real-time commands work fine through the SOCKS5 proxy server.
Configuring the remote connections
Use the Remote Connections dialog box to configure the connection broker settings, general connection options, and authentication settings.
Configure the broker setup
About this task
This section describes how to configure the broker setup on your thin client.
54 Configuring connectivity
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, select a VDI broker from the Broker type drop-down list, and configure the broker settings.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the General Options
About this task
This section describes how to configure the general options on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the General Options tab, and do the following:
Figure 18. General options a. Click one of the following options to set the action that the thin client should perform after you exit all sessions:
● None
● Sign-off automatically
● Shutdown the system automatically —If you select this option, you must specify a time period after which the thin client shuts down.
● Restart the system automatically —If you select this option, you must specify a time period after which the thin client restarts.
NOTE: By default, None is selected and the thin client automatically returns to the terminal desktop.
b. Enter the default username in the Default Sign-on Username field.
c. Enter the default password in the Default Sign-on password field.
d. Enter the default domain in the Default Sign-on Domain field.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configuring connectivity 55
Configuring the central configurations
Use the Central Configuration dialog box to configure the Wyse Management Suite server settings.
Configure the Wyse Management Suite settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Wyse Management Suite settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Central Configuration .
The Central Configuration dialog box is displayed.
2. On the WMS tab, do the following:
Figure 19. Wyse Management Suite a. Select the Enable Wyse Management Suite (WMS) check box to enable the Wyse Management Suite to discover your thin client. By default, this option is selected. Wyse Management Suite service automatically runs after the client boots.
NOTE: If the first discovery, for example, the Wyse Management Suite service is not successful, it continues until a discovery is successful. If all discoveries fail, it is started again automatically.
b. Select the DNS SRV record check box if you want the thin client to obtain the Wyse Management Suite values through
DNS server, and then try to register into the Wyse Management Suite server. By default, the check box is selected. If the check box selection is canceled, the thin client cannot obtain the Wyse Management Suite values through the DNS server.
c. In the Group Registration Key field, enter the group registration key as configured by your Wyse Management Suite administrator for your group. To verify the key, click Validate Key .
NOTE: A Group Registration Key is not required for the private Wyse Management Suite server. You can provide the Wyse Management Suite server details to enable the device to check in to Wyse Management Suite. ThinOS registers to a quarantine tenant in Wyse Management Suite.
56 Configuring connectivity
d. Select the Enable WMS Advanced Settings check box to enter the Wyse Management Suite server details and to enable the CA validation. By default, the MQTT server option is disabled. The MQTT server value is populated after the
ThinOS device is checked in to the Wyse Management Suite.
NOTE: If you enable the external secure MQTT option on the Wyse Management Suite server, the thin client automatically fetches the MQTT server <tls://xxx.xxx.xxx:8443>. If port 1883 is blocked in the Wyse Management
Suite server, the ThinOS client cannot switch to the External Secure MQTT server from the External MQTT server.
If you are blocking port 1883, select External Secure MQTT as Preferred MQTT in the Wyse Management Suite server first.
e. Select the CA validation check box if you want to enable the CA validation feature.
The CA validation is required when you import certificates into your Wyse Management Suite server. By default, the CA
Validation check box is selected to improve the security when using the Wyse Management Suite cloud. This change affects connections to any of the following servers:
● *.dellmobilitymanager.com
● *.cloudclientmanager.com
● *.wysemanagementsuite.com
Table 18. CA validation
Wyse Management
Suite deployment
Private cloud
CA Validation
When you deploy Wyse Management Suite on a private cloud, the Enable CA Validation check box is available to configure after you specify the server details in the WMS Server field. By default, the check box is selected.
Public cloud When you deploy Wyse Management Suite on a public cloud, the Enable CA Validation check box is selected by default. You cannot disable the Enable CA Validation option.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
NOTE: When you modify the Wyse Management Suite information, a dialog box is displayed prompting you to restart the thin client. To apply the settings immediately, click Reboot . If you do not want to restart your client, click Cancel .
Configure the VPN Manager
VPN Manager is included to manage Virtual Private Network connections. ThinOS uses the OpenConnect client that is based on the SSL protocol for connecting to a VPN.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the VPN Manager on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > VPN Manager .
The VPN Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. To create a session, click the + icon and do the following:
Configuring connectivity 57
Figure 20. VPN Manager a. Enter the name of the session in the Name field. This option is mandatory. The maximum character limit is 21 characters.
b. Enter the IP address of the VPN server in the Server field. This option is mandatory and is defined as either an IP address or a hostname. The maximum character limit is 63 characters.
c. Enter the login username in the Username field. This option is mandatory. The maximum character limit is 31 characters.
d. Enter the password in the Password field. This option is not mandatory. The maximum character limit is 31 characters.
e. Click the Auto-connection on system startup button to automatically connect to the VPN when the device restarts.
f. Click the Show progress in detail button to display the VPN connection progress.
g. Click the Show debug information button to display the VPN debug details for better troubleshooting.
h. Click OK .
When connections are created, the Auto column displays which connection is automatically connected when the device restarts. Only one session can be set to autoconnect.
3. Select a session and click Connect .
4. Click OK to save your changes.
Configure VNC services
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Expand Services and click VNC Service .
4. To enable VNC shadowing, click the Enable VNC Daemon button.
a. Enter the password in the Password field. The password length is restricted to eight characters from ThinOS 9.1.2101.
b. Click the Enable 8 bits button to use 8-bit color resolution.
c. Click the Enable VNC Prompt button to display a prompt to allow or reject a VNC shadowing request.
The shadowing request times out if there is no user interaction. The following options can be set for a timeout.
58 Configuring connectivity
● Select Timeout Type —Select the action to be performed after the VNC shadowing request times out. You can select Accept or Reject.
● Timeout —Specify a time between 0 to 600 seconds for the VNC shadowing request to timeout, if there is no user interaction.
d. Click the Enable View Only button to activate the view only mode.
e. Click the Active Visible button to notify the user that the device is being shadowed.
f. Enter the IP addresses from which VNC connections can be initiated, in the VNCD Server field .
g. Specify the VNC port used for TCP-based connections in the VNCD TCP Port field.
The default port is 5900. The current connection is not affected when you change the port. The port change takes effect during the next VNC connection.
5. Click Save & Publish .
Configuring connectivity 59
6
Configuring connection brokers
In a Virtual Desktop Infrastructure (VDI) environment, a connection broker is a software entity that enables you to connect to an available desktop. The connection broker facilitates the VDI environment to securely and efficiently manage the centrally hosted desktop environments.
Configuring Citrix
Citrix offers a complete virtualization solution, where all applications and resources are deployed on a centralized server, and published to remote devices. In ThinOS 9.x, Citrix Receiver is replaced by Citrix Workspace app. Citrix Workspace app, a client software released by Citrix, enables you to access all your virtual apps, desktops, and other Citrix products from a single workspace UI. For more information about Citrix Workspace App, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
In ThinOS 9.1, Citrix Workspace app is updated to version 2101. For known issues and the list of the features that are not supported, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
To access Citrix sessions using Citrix Workspace app, do the following:
1. Deploy the Citrix Workspace app package using Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
2. Go to System Setup > Remote Connections > Broker setup , and configure the Citrix broker.
NOTE: For information about the supported Citrix Workspace app features in ThinOS 9.1, see the Citrix Workspace app feature matrix table in the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
Configure the Citrix broker setup
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Citrix broker setup on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, and do the following:
60 Configuring connection brokers
Figure 21. Broker Setup a. Select the Workspace Mode check box if you want to enable the Citrix Workspace based layout of published applications and desktops.
b. In the Broker Server field, enter the IP address or hostname or FQDN of the Citrix server. You can enter the Citrix
NetScaler Gateway URL, StoreFront URL, or the web interface URL.
c. In the Auto Connect List field, enter the name of the connection that is displayed in Connection Manager to automatically connect after you log in the Citrix broker. You can enter more than one connection name. Each connection name is separated by semi-colon, and is case-sensitive.
d. Select the Enable automatic reconnection at logon check box if you want to automatically reconnect to the disconnected sessions or both active and disconnected sessions during login. You must click either of the following options:
● Connect to disconnected session only
● Connect to active and disconnected sessions e. Select the Enable automatic reconnection from button menu check box if you want to automatically reconnect to the disconnected sessions or both active and disconnected sessions by using the Reconnect button in the button menu.
You must click either of the following options:
● Connect to disconnected session only
● Connect to active and disconnected sessions
To use the reconnect option, left-click the button menu, and click Reconnect .
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configuring connection brokers 61
Classic mode vs Workspace mode
This section summarizes the differences between classic mode and workspace mode.
Figure 22. Classic mode
Figure 23. Workspace mode
62 Configuring connection brokers
Table 19. Classic mode vs Workspace mode
Item
How to enable
Desktop elements
Classic mode
By default, the ThinOS loads the classic mode if you do not select the Workspace mode check box during Citrix broker setup.
Displays the ThinOS full taskbar and the classic desktop.
Access all published desktops
Access all published apps
Access favorites
Access Connection
Manager
Click the icon on the classic desktop to launch the published desktop.
Click the icon on the classic desktop to launch the published application.
Not applicable
On the left corner of the taskbar, click
Displays all icons of desktop and applications.
You cannot switch the account.
.
Switch account when logged in with multi server
Refresh Citrix application
Click the PNAmenu button on the taskbar, and then click Refresh .
Reconnect a session Click the PNAmenu button on the taskbar, and then click Reconnect .
Workspace mode
Select the Workspace mode check box during Citrix broker setup.
Displays the ThinOS full taskbar and the workspace desktop.
Click the Desktops icon on the purple ribbon to access all the published desktops.
Click the APPS icon on the purple ribbon to access all the published desktops.
Click the Favorites icon on the purple ribbon.
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Connection Manager .
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Accounts .
Disconnect from the session
Log off all the connected ICA sessions
Sign out of broker agent
Use search bar
Access Desktop
Viewer/Toolbar
Click the PNAmenu button on the taskbar, and then click Disconnect .
Click the PNAmenu button on the taskbar, and then click
Click the
Logoff .
Sign-off
Not applicable
button in Connection
Manager or from the Shutdown menu.
Click the Desktop Viewer/Toolbar on the top center of the Citrix session screen to use the following toolbar options:
● Home
● Switch
● Ctrl+Alt+Del
● Window/Full-screen
● Preferences
● Save Layout
● Disconnect
● Sign Out
You can switch a session between a windowed and a full-screen session window. Save layout is available only for the local AD user session and not for users who use SAML authentication to log in to the Citrix session.
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Refresh .
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Connection Center >
Reconnect .
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Connection Center >
Disconnect .
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Connection Center >
Logoff .
Click the button menu in the upper-right corner of the screen, and then click Sign out. You can also click Sign out from the Shutdown menu.
Use the search bar on the upper-right of the screen to search for your workspace item. You can open apps directly from the search results.
Click the Desktop Viewer/Toolbar on the top center of the Citrix session screen to use the following toolbar options:
● Home
● Switch
● Ctrl+Alt+Del
● Window/Full-screen
● Preferences
● Save Layout
● Disconnect
● Sign Out
You can switch a session between a windowed and a full-screen session window. Save layout is available only for the local AD user session and not for users who use SAML authentication to log in to the Citrix session.
Configuring connection brokers 63
Citrix ADC
ThinOS supports Citrix Application Delivery Controller (ADC), formerly known as Citrix NetScaler. The following authentication methods are supported on ThinOS:
● Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
● RSA
● DUO
● SMS PASSCODE
● Native OTP
● Federated Authentication Service with Azure active directory
● OKTA
Citrix two-factor authentication
ThinOS supports Citrix two-factor authentication that authenticates the identity of the user twice before granting access, adding an extra level of security.
For local authentication, there must be a user profile that is created in the Citrix ADC database. For external authentication, the username and password that is entered must be the same as registered in the authentication server. After a successful validation of the username and password, the user is requested for another level of authentication.
ThinOS supports LDAP, RSA+LDAP, SMS Passcode, DUO, OKTA, and Azure MFA authentications by default. The user must only provide the Citrix ADC gateway address.
To log in to NetScaler Gateway that uses LDAP with RSA authentication, you must select LDAP+RSA in the Wyse
Management Suite policy. You can also go to Admin Policy Tool and configure the NetScaler/ADC Authentication Method option in the Citrix Broker Settings window.
For specific users who want to use Citrix ADC authentication methods, such as RSA, it is recommended that you configure the
NetScaler/ADC Authentication Method with RSA either using the Wyse Management Suite policy or Admin Policy Tool.
For specific users who want to use Citrix ADC authentication methods, such as LDAP with MFA, it is recommended that you configure the NetScaler/ADC Authentication Method with LDAP either using the Wyse Management Suite policy or the
Admin Policy tool.
Configure Citrix ADC using LDAP and RSA
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) using LDAP and RSA authentication.
Steps
1. Go to NetScaler > NetScaler Gateway > Virtual Servers , and click Edit .
2. Set the primary and secondary authentications based on the following scenarios:
● If you use LDAP and RSA login, ensure that the primary authentication is LDAP and secondary authentication is RADIUS.
You must also ensure that the NetScaler Gateway Authentication Method in the Wyse Management Suite policy or the Admin Policy Tool is configured as LDAP+RSA.
● If you use RSA and LDAP login, ensure that the primary authentication is RADIUS and secondary authentication is LDAP.
● If you use only LDAP login, ensure that the primary authentication is LDAP and secondary authentication is none.
3. Go to System Setup > Remote Connections and select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker type drop-down list.
4. Enter the Citrix ADC server address in the Broker Server field.
5. Log off from the client desktop, or restart the thin client.
The login window for Citrix ADC is displayed.
For more information about configuring Citrix ADC with LDAP, RSA authentication, see the Citrix NetScaler Gateway Guide at www.citrix.com
.
64 Configuring connection brokers
Configuring Citrix ADC using DUO
About this task
To configure the Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) using DUO authentication, do the following:
Steps
1. Go to NetScaler > NetScaler Gateway > Virtual Servers , and click Edit .
2. Ensure that the primary authentication is RADIUS that is configured with the DUO authentication RADIUS.
3. Ensure that the secondary authentication is none.
4. Enter the broker address in the ThinOS user interface.
Example
For more information about configuring Citrix ADC with DUO authentication, see the Citrix NetScaler Gateway Guide at www.duo.com
.
Configure Citrix ADC using CensorNet MFA authentication
Prerequisites
SMS PASSCODE is re-branded as CensorNet MFA. You can configure the Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) to use a One
Time Passcode/Password (OTP) in the form of a personal identification number (PIN) or passcode. To obtain this one-time password, you must install CensorNet app on your mobile. After you enter the passcode or PIN, the authentication server invalidates the one-time password. You cannot enter the same PIN or password again. For more information about configuring one-time passcode, see the Citrix documentation .
Prerequisites
● Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) v12.0 and later is installed on your client.
● SMS PASSCODE v9.0 SP1 or later is installed and configured in your network. You can download the SMS PASSCODE v9.0
file from download.smspasscode.com/public/6260/SmsPasscode-900sp1 .
● Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) authentication policy is configured and bind to the Citrix ADC server.
● CensorNet app is installed and configured on your mobile device.
About this task
To use the one-time passcode on ThinOS, do the following:
Steps
1. Log in to ThinOS and connect to the ADC URL.
2. Enter your credentials, and press Enter .
The PASSCODE dialog box is displayed. You will receive a push notification from the CensorNet App on your phone with the code.
3. Click OK .
If the authentication is successful, you are logged into the Citrix session.
Citrix ADC Native OTP
Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) Native OTP enables Citrix ADC Gateway to use one-time passwords (OTPs) for authentication without the need of an extra authenticating server. A one-time password that is generated by Google Authenticator is considered to be highly secure as passcodes are randomly generated.
If you access the Broker agent using Citrix ADC native OTP authentication, lock terminal is not supported as it is a web-based authentication. When you try to use lock terminal, a message is displayed where you can click either Continue to log off or click
Cancel to stay on the screen. You are automatically signed off from the account in sixty seconds for security purposes.
Configuring connection brokers 65
Figure 24. Unable to lock account
For more information about Native OTP support for authentication, see the NetScaler Gateway12.0 documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Log in to Citrix ADC using the passcode
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you are using Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) 12.0 build 51.24 and later versions.
● Ensure that you have registered your device with Citrix ADC. For a detailed procedure on how to register your device with
Citrix ADC, see the Native OTP support for authentication article at docs.citrix.com
.
About this task
This section describes how to log in to Citrix ADC using the OTP.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Broker Setup tab and select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker Type drop-down list.
3. Enter the IP address of the Citrix ADC FQDN server in the Broker Server field.
You can configure other options if required.
4. Click OK .
The NetScaler login window is displayed.
5. Launch the Google Authenticator application on your phone and get the passcode.
6. In the Citrix ADC login window, enter the passcode and click OK .
If the authentication is successful, you are logged into Citrix ADC.
Citrix Federated Authentication Service SAML with Microsoft Azure Active
Directory
ThinOS supports the Citrix Federated Authentication Service with Microsoft Azure Active Directory during single sign-on to
Citrix ADC using the Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) based authentication. The FAS server delegates the user authentication to the Microsoft ADFS server or Azure AD with Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML). Both, Azure AD
Multiple Factors Authentication (MFA) and Self-service password reset (SSPR), are supported.
If you access the Broker agent using SAML, lock terminal is not supported as it is a web-based authentication. When you try to use lock terminal, a message is displayed where you can click either Continue to log off or click Cancel to stay on the screen.
You are automatically signed off from the account in sixty seconds for security purposes.
66 Configuring connection brokers
Figure 25. Unable to lock account
Enable Azure Multiple Factor Authentication for Citrix ADC Single Sign-on with SAML
Authentication
Prerequisites
● Create an Azure AD user in Azure Active Directory.
● Enable the Multiple Factor Authentication (MFA) for the user.
● Add the user to Azure AD Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) Enterprise application users and groups.
● Ensure that the shadow account of the user exists in local domain users group.
● Ensure that the SAML authentication policy is enabled. For more information, see the NetScaler Gateway documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
About this task
This section describes how to log in to Citrix ADC using SAML with Azure Multiple Factor Authentication.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker Type drop-down list.
3. Enter the Citrix ADC Gateway URL in the Broker Server field, and click OK .
The login window is displayed.
4. Enter the username of the Azure AD user and click Next .
5. Enter the initial password for the Azure AD user, and click Sign in .
6. In the More information required window, click Next .
7. On the Additional Security Verification page, do the following: a. From the How should we contact you?
drop-down list, select any one of the following methods:
● Authentication phone
● Mobile app b. If you select Authentication phone , enter your phone number. If you select Mobile App , click Set up and follow the on-screen instructions to add an account to the Microsoft authenticator app.
c. Click Save .
8. Enter the Azure AD username with the initial password again.
9. If you are using mobile app, approve the notification. If you are using the authentication phone, verify your information through a phone call or a text code.
10. Log in to Citrix ADC and launch the session.
Enable Azure AD Self-Service Password Reset function for Citrix ADC Single Sign-on with SAML authentication
Prerequisites
1. Create an Azure AD user in Azure Active Directory.
Configuring connection brokers 67
2. Add the user to Azure AD Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) Enterprise application users and groups.
3. Ensure that the shadow account of the user exists in local domain users group.
4. Ensure that Self-Service Password Reset Enabled option is selected in Azure AD for the user.
About this task
This section describes how to enable Azure AD Self-Service Password Reset function for Citrix ADC Single Sign-on with SAML authentication.
Steps
1. On the Broker setup tab, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker type drop-down list.
2. In the Broker Server field, enter the Citrix ADC Gateway URL, and click OK .
The login window is displayed.
3. Enter the user credentials of the Azure AD user and click Next .
4. On the Don't lose access to your account!
page, configure the following options:
● Authentication Phone a. Click Set it up now .
b. From the drop-down list, select your country code.
c. Enter your phone number.
d. Click either text me or call me .
A verification code is received on your phone by call or text message.
e. Enter the verification code and click Verify .
● Authentication Email a. Click Set it up now .
b. Enter the valid email address.
c. Click email me .
A verification code is sent to your email.
d. Enter the verification code and click Verify .
5. Click Finish .
6. Continue with the user login.
Configure Citrix NetScaler using Okta
Okta provides Single Sign-On (SSO) capability using Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) for Citrix Virtual
Apps and Desktops. ThinOS supports Okta through the Citrix NetScaler Gateway 11.0 or later. The Okta RADIUS Agent is used for user authentication. The Okta RADIUS server agent assigns the user authentication to Okta using single-factor authentication (SFA) or multifactor authentication (MFA).
For more information about configuring Citrix NetScaler Gateway to use the Okta RADIUS Agent, see the Citrix NetScaler
Gateway Radius Configuration Guide at help.okta.com
.
NOTE:
● On the ThinOS client, you need UPN at the login window.
● Phone authentication by using Okta is supported only in US and Canada.
Limitation
Only OKTA with Citrix Gateway (RADIUS) is verified. However, the StoreFront with OKTA SAML authentication or OKTA with
Citrix Gateway (SAML) is not verified.
Citrix Cloud services
ThinOS supports Citrix Cloud services. It acts as a single management console to deploy applications or desktops on any virtual or cloud setup for a secure digital workspace. For more information about Citrix Cloud services, see the Citrix Cloud article at docs.citrix.com
.
68 Configuring connection brokers
Getting started with Citrix Cloud
About this task
This section describes how to log in to the Citrix Cloud server on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker Type drop-down list, and do the following: a. Select the Workspace Mode check box if you want to enable the Citrix Workspace-based layout of published applications and desktops. If this option is not selected, you are logged in to the classic mode.
b. In the Broker Server field, enter the Citrix Cloud URL.
c. In the Auto Connect List field, enter the name of the desktops that you want to launch automatically after logging in to Citrix Cloud. You can enter more than one desktop. Each desktop name is separated by a semi-colon and is case sensitive.
d. Select the Enable automatic reconnection at logon check box if you want to automatically reconnect to the disconnected sessions or both active and disconnected sessions during login. You must click either of the following options:
● Connect to disconnected session only
● Connect to active and disconnected sessions e. Select the Enable automatic reconnection from button menu check box if you want to automatically reconnect to the disconnected sessions or both active and disconnected sessions by using the Reconnect button in the button menu.
You must click either of the following options:
● Connect to disconnected session only
● Connect to active and disconnected sessions
3. Click OK to save your settings.
4. In the login window, enter your domain username and password to log in to Citrix Cloud.
ICA icons are displayed in Connection Manager and on the client desktop.
Automatically configure using DNS for email discovery
You can connect to a Citrix session by using an email address. The email address is used to discover the StoreFront or NetScaler
Gateway URL.
Prerequisites
● Install a valid server certificate on the StoreFront/AppController server and Access Gateway appliance.
● The full chain or path to the root certificate must be correct.
About this task
This section describes how to connect to a Citrix session by using email-based discovery.
Steps
1. Add a service record (SRV) to your DNS server to enable email-based discovery. To add a service record to the DNS server, do the following: a. Log in to the DNS server.
b. Go to DNS > Forward Lookup Zone .
c. Right-click Forward Lookup Zone , and click Other New Records .
d. In the Resource Record Type dialog box, select Service Location (SRV) .
e. Click Create Record .
f. In the Service field, enter _citrixreceiver .
g. In the Protocol field, enter _tcp .
h. In the Port number field, enter the port number.
Configuring connection brokers 69
i.
In the Host offering this service field, enter the FQDN and the port for the StoreFront/AppController server or Access
Gateway appliance.
NOTE: You cannot use the same FQDN for both StoreFront and the Access Gateway virtual servers.
2. On ThinOS, go to System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
3. On the Broker Setup dialog box, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker Type drop-down list.
4. Enter the email address in the Broker Server field, and click OK .
5. Restart the thin client.
6. In the login window, enter your email address and password to log in to the session.
Citrix HDX Adaptive transport (EDT)
ThinOS supports Citrix HDX Adaptive transport for Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops. HDX Adaptive transport enables the ICA virtual channels to automatically adapt to varying LAN and WLAN connections and improves the data throughput.
For more information about Citrix HDX Adaptive transport, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Enable HDX Adaptive Transport
About this task
This section describes how to enable the HDX Adaptive Transport policy setting on Citrix Studio.
Steps
1. Go to Citrix Studio > HDX Adaptive Transport policy.
2. Set the value for HDX Adaptive Transport to either Preferred or Diagnostic mode .
For more information about configuration on Citrix Studio, see the Adaptive Transport article at docs.citrix.com
.
3. On the ThinOS client, start a session from the Citrix Workspace app.
The connection is established using adaptive transport.
NOTE: If the connection type is HDX and the protocol is UDP, EDT is active for the session. If the protocol is TCP, the session is in fallback mode.
For information about how to verify if HDX Adaptive Transport is active, see the
HDX Adaptive Display V2
ThinOS supports the selective use of a video codec (H.264) to compress graphics during video playback in an ICA session. This feature combines the H.264 mode and Thinwire Compatible mode for a better user experience.
For more information about HDX Adaptive Display V2, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Enable HDX Adaptive Display V2
About this task
This section describes how to enable HDX Adaptive Display V2 using Citrix Studio.
Steps
1. Go to Citrix Studio > Use video codec for compression policy .
2. Select the For actively changing regions option.
3. On the ThinOS client, launch an ICA desktop.
4. Open the web browser and play your preferred video.
70 Configuring connection brokers
HDX adaptive display V2 is used for video decoding on the ThinOS client. Thinwire uses JPEG (lossy) for complex or photographic imagery and RLE (lossless) for text imagery. The rest of the screen is decomposed by Thinwire.
For more information about the Use video codec for compression policy, see the Graphics Policy Settings article at docs.citrix.com
.
Browser Content Redirection
Browser content redirection enables any web browser content, including HTML 5 videos, to be redirected to the ThinOS client and not redirected on the VDA side.
Browser content redirection proxy setting — If you use the browser content redirection proxy settings, enter a valid proxy address and port number in the browser content redirection proxy configuration policy. Citrix Workspace app follows the server fetch and client render mechanism to fetch URL from VDA and redirect browser content from the client.
NOTE: In ThinOS 9.0, browser content redirection uses a WebkitGTK+ based overlay to render the content. Chromium
Embedded Framework (CEF) for browser content redirection will be enabled in later releases.
Enable Browser Content Redirection
Prerequisites
● If you are using a Chrome browser, import the BCR extension into the browser.
● If you are using a IE browser, ensure the Citrix HDXJsInjector add-on exists in the browser.
● If you are using an RDS-hosted desktop, and if you are using a IE browser, install the BCR add-on manually from Citrix virtual apps and desktops IOS installer.
About this task
This section describes how to enable Browser Content Redirection using Citrix Studio.
Steps
1. Go to Citrix Studio > Browser Content Redirection policy .
2. Select the Allowed option.
This enables the Browser Content Redirection policy.
3. In the Browser Content Redirection Access Control List (ACL) policy settings, add URLs that can use the browser content redirection.
NOTE: Ensure that the URL is not listed in the Browser Content Redirection Blacklist Configuration policy.
4. On the ThinOS client, launch an ICA desktop.
5. Open either IE or Chrome and enter the URL that you have added in the Access Control List (ACL).
The browser viewport is rendered on the ThinOS client side. Browser attributes such as Address Bar and Status Bar still run on the VDA side.
For more information about Browser Content Redirection, see the Browser Content Redirection article at docs.citrix.com
.
HTML5 Video Redirection
HTML5 Video Redirection controls and optimizes the way Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops servers deliver HTML5 multimedia web content to users. This feature is available for internal web pages only. It requires the addition of JavaScript to the web pages where the HTML5 multimedia content is available, for example, videos on an internal training site.
The following policies must be enabled on the server side:
● Windows Media redirection —By default this option is enabled.
● HTML5 video redirection —By default this option is disabled.
For more information about the ICA Multimedia policy settings, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
For information about how to verify if HTML5 Video Redirection is working, see the
Configuring connection brokers 71
Windows Media Redirection
Windows Media Redirection enables the audio and video to be rendered on the user device instead of running on the server side.
Using the Windows Media Redirection feature, you can optimize the performance of Windows Media player on virtual Windows desktops.
For more information about Windows Media Redirection, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Enable Windows Media Redirection
Prerequisites
Ensure that the Windows Media redirection policy is set to Allowed in Citrix Studio. By default, the value is set to Allowed .
About this task
This section describes how to enable the Windows Media Redirection feature on your thin client.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS desktop, click Connection Manager .
2. Click Global Connection Settings .
3. Select the Enable HDX/MMR check box for the ICA connection.
4. Go to System Setup > Remote Connections .
5. On the Broker Setup tab, select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker type drop-down list.
6. Enter the Citrix server in the Broker Server field, and click OK .
7. Launch an ICA desktop.
8. Open Windows Media Player and play a video or an audio file.
The following types are supported:
● H.264 video
● WMV-9 video
● WMV-8 video
● WMV-7 video
● WMC1 video
● MP4 video
● 4K video
● MOV/AVI video
● AAC/MP3/WMA file
For more information about the ICA Multimedia policy settings, see Citrix Product documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
QUMU Video Optimization Pack for Citrix
QUMU's Video Optimization Pack (VOP) for Citrix enables you to stream quality videos to endpoints managed by Citrix Virtual
Apps and Desktops servers by enabling client-side fetching. The QVOP video player runs on the client side and the video stream uses the client's network to go directly to QUMU's Video Control Center instead of accessing through VDI desktops.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the Windows Media redirection policy is set to Allowed in Citrix Studio. By default, the value is set to Allowed .
About this task
This section describes how to use QUMU Video Optimization Pack for Citrix on your thin client.
72 Configuring connection brokers
Steps
1. On the ThinOS desktop, click Connection Manager .
2. Click Global Connection Settings .
3. Select the Enable HDX/MMR check box for the ICA connection.
4. Go to System Setup > Remote Connections , select Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops from the Broker type drop-down list.
5. On the Broker Setup tab, enter the Citrix server in the Broker Server field, and click OK .
6. Launch an ICA desktop.
7. Download and install the QUMU Media Player on the remote desktop.
NOTE: Contact your QUMU partner to get the QUMU media player.
8. Open the Internet Explorer browser and play a QUMU published video.
For more information about the ICA Multimedia policy settings, see Citrix Product documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Citrix Self-Service Password Reset
You can reset the password or unlock the account after you complete the security questions enrollment.
Supported Environment
● Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops 7.11 and later versions
● Support StoreFront Server 3.7 and later versions
● Self-Service Password Reset Server 1.0 and later versions
Supported platforms —All platforms are supported.
Limitation
● Supports only StoreFront Server
Before resetting a password or unlocking an account
Before resetting your password or unlocking your account, you must register for the security questions enrollment. To register your answers for the security questions, do the following:
1. To access the Security Questions Enrollment window, do the following step that is applicable to the mode: a. In Classic mode, click the Manage Security Questions option from the PNAmenu.
b. In Workspace mode, click the TASKS icon on the purple ribbon and click Start .
The Security Questions Enrollment window is displayed.
2. Enter the appropriate answers to the question set.
3. Click OK to register the security questions.
Use the Account Self-Service
After the security questions enrollment is complete, and when ThinOS is connected to a StoreFront server with Self-Service
Password Reset enabled, the Account Self-Service icon is displayed in the sign-on window.
NOTE: If you enter the wrong password more than four times in the Sign-on window, the client automatically enters the unlock account process.
1. Click the Account Self-Service icon to unlock your account or reset your password.
NOTE: You must register the security questions for users before using the unlock account or reset password feature.
2. Click Unlock account or Reset password based on your choice, and then click OK .
Configuring connection brokers 73
Unlock an account
After you register the security questions, do the following to unlock your account:
1. Choose a task (Unlock account) in the Account Self-Service window.
2. Enter the username.
The Unlock Account dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the registered answers to the security questions.
If the provided answers match the registered answers, then the Unlock Account dialog box is displayed.
4. Click OK to successfully unlock your account.
NOTE:
● If the provided answers are incorrect, an error message is displayed.
● If you provide the wrong answers more than three times, you cannot unlock the account or reset the password, and error messages are displayed.
Reset a password
After you register the security questions, do the following to reset your password:
1. Choose a task (Reset password) in the Account Self-Service window.
2. Enter the username.
The Reset Password dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the registered answers to the security questions.
If the provided answers match the registered answers, then the Reset Password dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter and confirm the new password.
5. Click OK to successfully change the password.
If you provide the wrong answers, you cannot reset the password, and an error message is displayed.
Citrix SuperCodec
Citrix SuperCodec is a H.264 decoder integrated on the ThinOS client side. The server encodes the session image into the
H.264 stream and sends it to the client side. The client decodes the H.264 stream by SuperCodec and display the image on the screen. This feature improves the user experience, especially for HDX 3D Pro desktops.
Citrix SuperCodec is supported in Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops (XenApp and XenDesktop) version 7.5 or later versions.
In Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops version 7.9 and later, the default setting for Use video codec for compression is
Use when preferred . For best performance on ThinOS device, it is recommended that you set the Use video codec for compression policy to For the entire screen . You can set the policy to Do not use video codec . This policy setting allows
ThinOS to use ThinWire Plus that saves bandwidth and reduces the CPU overhead. You can also set the policy to For actively changing regions . This policy setting allows ThinOS to use Selective H.264
.
● ThinWire Plus —Equivalent to the Do not use video codec option
● Fullscreen H.264
—Equivalent to the For the entire screen option
● Selective H.264
—Equivalent to the For actively changing regions
Anonymous logon
The Anonymous logon feature enables the users to log into the StoreFront server configured with unauthenticated store without Active Directory (AD) user credentials. It allows unauthenticated users to access the applications instead of AD accounts.
NOTE: Anonymous logon is not supported with legacy mode of StoreFront server.
74 Configuring connection brokers
Enable UDP audio in a Citrix session
Citrix recommends that you use audio over User Datagram Protocol (UDP) in low-bandwidth network connections for better audio quality. ThinOS does not support UDP audio over Citrix ADC (formerly NetScaler) due to Linux Citrix Workspace app limitation.
Steps
1. Start the Admin Policy Tool on your ThinOS 9.0-based device or open the ThinOS 9.x
Policy settings in Wyse
Management Suite.
If you are using the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS, you must first select the audio quality as Medium and then enable UPD audio. UPD audio is automatically disabled when you select the audio quality as High on Admin Policy Tool. However, the
UPD audio is not automatically disabled when you are configuring the setting using Wyse Management Suite. UPD audio may not work if you set the audio quality as High using Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click Citrix Session Settings .
3. In the Basic Settings section, click the Enable UPD Audio toggle key to ON state.
4. From the Audio Quality drop-down list, select Medium .
If you are using the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS, you must first select the audio quality as Medium and then enable UPD audio. UPD audio is automatically disabled when you select the audio quality as High on Admin Policy Tool. However, the
UPD audio is not automatically disabled when you are configuring the setting using Wyse Management Suite. UPD audio may not work if you set the audio quality as High using Wyse Management Suite.
Keyboard layout synchronization in VDA
In Citrix Workspace app, the Keyboard Dynamic synchronization mode functions differently on a Linux client from a Windows client. In general, on a Linux client, the keyboard output follows the client keyboard layout, which is different from the Windows
VDA layout. If a Linux client keyboard is synchronized to a Windows VDA, users may observe unpredictable keyboard output.
Also, in dynamic synchronization mode, Citrix Workspace app for Linux does not support VDA users to switch the keyboard layout inside a VDA session.
In the server default mode, both Linux and Windows use the session (VDA) side keyboard layout with predictable output. You can configure the keyboard layout mode using either Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool. The keyboard layout that you select on the thin client is not automatically synchronized in the VDA session. ThinOS supports the server default mode that enables VDA users to select or switch the keyboard layout inside the VDA session using the Windows Input Method Editor (IME) language bar. For other modes such as Specific keyboard, Client Setting, or Dynamic Sync, there can be unpredictable mismatch in the keyboard output if you switch the keyboard layout in VDA. This is because the Citrix Workspace app Linux keyboard sync mode does not support switching the layout in VDA.
As a VDA administrator, you must configure the VDA desktop with the required keyboard language layout options. The IME language bar must be enabled on the Windows lock screen. The VDA user can select the appropriate keyboard language layout on the Windows lock screen.
In scenarios such as opening a new application in a VDA session, locking, or unlocking the VDA session, the keyboard layout falls back to the VDA default layout. For example, EN_US. This is a known issue for a Linux client in the server default mode.
You can customize VDA registry settings for a consistent keyboard layout in the VDA session.
● For a desktop operating system VDA, the feature is enabled by default.
● For a server operating system VDA, you can enable the feature using the system registry.
1. In the system registry of VDA, go to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Keyboard
Layout .
2. Create a DWORD entry IgnoreRemoteKeyboardLayout=1 .
By default, the IgnoreRemoteKeyboardLayout entry is unavailable. The default keyboard is set to ENG, irrespective of the Control Panel setting.
For example, open an application, lock, or unlock the session, the keyboard is set to ENG. To resolve this issue, ensure that you set IgnoreRemoteKeyboardLayout=1 .
For information about the Keyboard Layout Modes and Keyboard Layout rules in Citrix Workspace app, see the Citrix Virtual
Apps and Desktops keyboard and IME configurations article at www.citrix.com/blogs .
Configuring connection brokers 75
Table 20. Citrix Workspace app keyboard layout configuration for VDA users on ThinOS
VDA user scenario
The client keyboard is synchronized to VDA, and the keyboard layout is not switched in the VDA desktop or application.
The client keyboard is synchronized to VDA, and the keyboard layout is switched in the VDA desktop using the IME language bar.
Wyse Management
Suite settings
Configure the required keyboard layout for local client users and remote VDA users.
VDA settings
Set the VDA policy for Dynamic synchronization.
Summary
Keyboard output follows the client Linux keyboard layout and not the Windows layout. As a result, there can be an unpredictable mismatch in the keyboard output. Citrix Workspace app Linux keyboard sync mode does not support switching the layout in VDA.
The client keyboard is synchronized to VDA, and the keyboard layout is switched in VDA published applications using the IME language bar.
The client keyboard is not synchronized to
VDA, and the keyboard layout is not switched in the VDA desktop or application.
Configure the required keyboard layout for using the client locally. There is no impact to the keyboard usage on remote VDA.
No specific settings are required.
For recommended settings, see the VDA settings for server default mode section.
The client keyboard is not synchronized to
VDA, and the keyboard layout is not switched in the VDA desktop using the IME language bar.
The client keyboard is not synchronized to VDA, and the keyboard layout is not switched in VDA published applications using the IME language bar.
Keyboard layout follows the VDA Windows layout with predictable output.
When opening a new application in a VDA session, locking the VDA session, or unlocking the VDA session, the keyboard layout falls back to the VDA default layout. For example, EN_US.
The following are the recommended settings for
VDA administrators:
● Enable multiple layouts in VDA IME.
● Enable IME on the Windows lock screen.
● Set the default keyboard layout to any non-
English keyboard layout.
● In the system registry of VDA, go to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\Current
ControlSet\Control\Keyboard
Layout and create the following DWORD entry:
IgnoreRemoteKeyboardLayout=1 .
For more information, see the Citrix article
CTX223316 at www.support.citrix.com
.
Table 21. Language keyboard layout settings
ThinOS keyboard layout
Windows layout Wyse Management Suite settings
Polish
Polish
(Legacy)
Keyboard layout partially matches with the Windows layout.
Keyboard layout fully matches with the Windows layout.
Not supported; will be supported in future release.
Not supported; will be supported in future release.
Citrix
Workspace app
Linux dynamic synchronization
Enabled
Enabled
Recommended settings
● On the client side, select the keyboard layout that fully matches with the Windows layout for local usage.
● On the VDA side, select the best layout from the Windows IME language bar after the connection is established.
76 Configuring connection brokers
Table 21. Language keyboard layout settings (continued)
ThinOS keyboard layout
Windows layout Wyse Management Suite settings
French
(France)
Keyboard layout partially matches with the Windows layout.
Supported
Citrix
Workspace app
Linux dynamic synchronization
Enabled
French
(Microsoft)
Not supported; will be supported in future release.
Enabled
Recommended settings
● For VDA administrators, see the
Citrix Workspace app keyboard layout configuration for VDA users on ThinOS table in this document.
Belgian
Belgian
(Comma)
Spanish
Keyboard layout fully matches with the Windows layout.
Keyboard layout does not match with the Windows layout.
Keyboard layout fully matches with the Windows layout.
Keyboard layout does not match with the Windows layout.
Not supported; will be supported in future release.
Not supported; will be supported in future release.
Supported
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
VDA settings for Server Default mode
When set to server default mode, the keyboard layout falls back to the VDA default layout. For example, EN_US. This issue can be related to Citrix Workspace app or Windows server operating system 2016 and 2019. All workarounds may require you to modify registry keys on the server side. For more information about workarounds, see the Citrix articles CTX269153 and
CTX223316 at support.citrix.com
. If you do not want to modify registry keys, contact the Citrix support team or the Microsoft support team.
Table 22. Citrix Workspace app Linux keyboard layout settings—Client and VDA
Mode
Server default
Client-side settings
~/.ICAClient/wfclient.ini
[WFClient] keyboardlayout=(Server
Default)
Server or VDA-side settings
Setting is configured on the
StoreFront server. For example,
C:\inetpub\wwwroot\Citrix\
[store name]
\App_Data\default.ica
[WFClient] keyboardlayout=(Server
Default)
Additional information
Set the mode on either the client side or the server side. This mode takes the highest priority.
Specific keyboard
~/.ICAClient/wfclient.ini
[WFClient] keyboardlayout=French
XenApp server version 2006 and higher —Enable the following policies on the server side:
● Set the Enable Unicode keyboard layout mapping to
Allowed .
XenApp server version before 2006
—There are no policies available to enable specific keyboard sync mode.
You must set the registry key in the
Windows VDA desktop Keyboard sync configuration. The setting is enabled by default on Windows Server 2012
Set the mode on either the client side or the server side. You must set the value in /opt/Citrix/
ICAClient/module.ini
[KeyboardLayout] .
Configuring connection brokers 77
Table 22. Citrix Workspace app Linux keyboard layout settings—Client and VDA (continued)
Mode Client-side settings Server or VDA-side settings and Windows 10 operating system.
The setting is disabled by default on
Windows Server 2016 and Windows
Server 2019.
To enable Unicode Keyboard Layout
Mapping for Windows VDA, add the following registry keys:
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWA
RE\Citrix\CtxKlMap\Enable
KlMap value= DWORD 1
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWA
RE\Citrix\CtxKlMap\Disabl eWindowHookvalue=DWORD 1
Additional information
Dynamic sync
Sync once
/opt/Citrix/ICAClient/ config/module.ini
[ICA 3.0]
KeyboardSync=On
~/.ICAClient/wfclient.ini
[WFClient] keyboardlayout=(User
Profile)
XenApp server version 2006 and higher —Enable the following policies on the server end:
● Set the Client Keyboard
Layout synchronization and IME improvement policy to Support dynamic client keyboard layout sychronization and IME improvement .
● Set the Enable Unicode keyboard layout mapping to
Allowed .
XenApp server version before 2006
—There are no policies available to enable dynamic sync mode. You must set the registry key in the
Windows VDA desktop Keyboard sync configuration. The setting is enabled by default on Windows Server 2012 and Windows 10 operating system.
The setting is disabled by default on
Windows Server 2016 and Windows
Server 2019.
To enable the setting, add the following registry key:
HKLM\Software\Citrix\ICA\Ic aIme\DisableKeyboardSync value=DWORD 0 .
To enable Unicode Keyboard Layout
Mapping for Windows VDA, add the following registry keys:
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWA
RE\Citrix\CtxKlMap\Enable
KlMap value= DWORD 1
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWA
RE\Citrix\CtxKlMap\Disabl eWindowHook value=DWORD 1
Not available
Set the mode on both the client side and the server side.
Not available /opt/Citrix/ICAClient/ config/module.ini
[ICA 3.0]
KeyboardSync=Off
~/.ICAClient/wfclient.ini
78 Configuring connection brokers
Table 22. Citrix Workspace app Linux keyboard layout settings—Client and VDA (continued)
Mode Client-side settings Server or VDA-side settings Additional information
[WFClient] keyboardlayout=(User
Profile)
Table 23. ThinOS dynamic synchronization support
Keyboard Synchronization
Arabic (Algeria) Not supported
Arabic (Bahrain)
Arabic (Egypt)
Arabic (Iraq)
Arabic (Jordan)
Arabic (Kuwait)
Arabic (Lebanon)
Arabic (Libya)
Arabic (Morocco)
Arabic (Oman)
Arabic (Qatar)
Arabic (Saudi Arabia)
Arabic (Syria)
Arabic (Tunisia)
Arabic (U.A.E)
Arabic (Yemen)
Canadian Multilingual
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
Croatian
Czech (Qwerty)
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English (3270 Australian)
English (Australian)
English (New Zealand)
English (United Kingdom)
English (United States)
Estonian (Estonia)
Finnish
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Supported.
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Configuring connection brokers 79
Table 23. ThinOS dynamic synchronization support (continued)
Keyboard
French (Canadian Legacy)
Synchronization
Supported
French (Canadian)
French (France)
French (France Microsoft)
French (Switzerland)
German (Switzerland)
German
Greek
Hungarian
Icelandic
Italian (Switzerland)
Italian
Japanese (OADG109A)
Japanese (KWD)
Korean (MS-IME2002)
Korean
Latvian (Latvia)
Lithuanian (IBM)
Lithuanian (Standard)
Norwegian
Polish
Polish (Legacy)
Portuguese (Brazil)
Portuguese
Romanian
Russian
Serbian
Slovenian
Spanish
Swedish
Turkish
U.S.International
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Supported. When you switch to the language Keyboard layout in VDA, the keyboard layout is synchronized to the English layout.
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
80 Configuring connection brokers
Enable keyboard layout mode
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click Citrix Session Settings .
3. In the Basic Settings section, select one of the following options from the Keyboard Layout Mode drop-down list.
● Server Default —ThinOS allows VDA users to use the VDA-side default keyboard when logging in or reconnecting to
VDA. This is the default setting in ThinOS. Any keyboard layout change on the client side is not synchronized to the VDA session.
● Specific Keyboard —ThinOS allows VDA users to use a specific keyboard when logging in or reconnecting to VDA. Any keyboard layout change on the client side is not synchronized to the VDA session. Ensure that you select a specific keyboard on the ThinOS client before configuring the Admin policy tool or the Wyse Management Suite policy. If not selected, you must reboot the thin client to synchronize the specific keyboard into VDA.
● Client Setting —ThinOS allows VDA users to synchronize only the VDA-side keyboard with the client-side default keyboard when logging in or reconnecting to VDA. Any keyboard layout change on the client-side is not synchronized to the VDA session.
● Dynamic Sync —ThinOS allows VDA users to synchronize the VDA-side keyboard with the client-side default keyboard dynamically in the VDA session. When the VDA user changes the client keyboard, the VDA keyboard is synchronized automatically in the session. You must configure both the client and VDA-side settings to enable this mode.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Cursor pattern in ICA session
In ThinOS 9.1.2101, you can change the cursor pattern in the ICA session.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click Citrix Session Settings .
3. Enter one of the following values in the Cursor Pattern field to change the cursor pattern:
● ffff,ffff —Enter this value to set the cursor color as black. This value is set by default.
● 0,0 —Enter this value to set the cursor color as white.
● aaaa,5555 —Enter this value to set the cursor color in a dotted pattern.
4. Click Save & Publish .
For the setting changes to take effect, you must either sign off from the Broker agent or restart the client.
Citrix multiple virtual channels
Citrix Workspace app 2101 provides limited support for using multiple virtual channels.
The following combinations of Unified Communications (UC) optimizations and their virtual channel settings are tested on
ThinOS:
Table 24. Unified Communication optimizations and their default virtual channel settings
Virtual
Channel categorie s
Settings Default status
Combinat ion 1
Combinat ion 2
Combinat ion 3
Combinat ion 4
Combinat ion 5
Combinat ion 6
UC Virtual
Channel
Settings
Microsoft
Teams
Optimizati on
RTME for
Skype for
Business
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Combinat ion 7
Disabled
Enabled
Configuring connection brokers 81
Table 24. Unified Communication optimizations and their default virtual channel settings (continued)
Virtual
Channel categorie s
Settings Default status
Combinat ion 1
Combinat ion 2
Combinat ion 3
Combinat ion 4
Combinat ion 5
Combinat ion 6
Combinat ion 7
Zoom
Meetings
Optimizati on
Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled
Other
Citrix
Virtual
Channels
Settings
JVDI for
Cisco
Jabber
Cisco
Webex
Meetings for VDI
Plugin
Cisco
Webex
Teams for
VDI Plugin
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
USB redirection
Enabled
Imprivata Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Zoom Meetings Optimization plug-in uses four virtual channels. To use Zoom Optimizations along with Microsoft Teams or any other Cisco optimizations, you must disable other virtual channels. For example, if you are not using Imprivata SSO, you can choose to disable the Imprivata virtual channel. Similarly, if you do not use Skype for Business, you can choose to disable the
RTME for Skype for Business virtual channel.
Configure the Citrix virtual channels settings
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool , or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click Citrix Session Settings .
3. In the UC Virtual Settings section, enable one or more Unified Communications (UC) virtual channels as per your preference. The available options are:
● Microsoft Teams Optimization
● RTME for Skype for Business
● Zoom Meetings Optimization
● JVDI for Cisco Jabber
● Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI
● Cisco Webex Teams for VDI
4. In the Other Citrix Virtual Channel settings , enable one or more virtual channels as per your preference. The available options are:
● USB redirection
● Imprivata
5. Click Save & Publish .
For the list of virtual channel combinations that are tested on ThinOS, see
Citrix multiple virtual channels
.
82 Configuring connection brokers
Configure the Citrix session properties
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Citrix HDX connections on your thin client.
Steps
1. On the taskbar, click Connection Manager .
The Connection Manager dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a Citrix connection from the list, and click Properties .
3. Click the Connection tab and do the following:
You can view Server or Published Application , Connection Description , Browser Servers , Host Name or Application
Name , and Encryption Level but cannot edit these options.
a.
Display Resolution —Select the display resolution for this connection.
If you select the Published Application option, the connection display enables you to select the Seamless Display
Resolution option.
b.
Window mode and Full screen mode —Select the initial view of the application and desktop in a windowed screen or full screen.
c.
Autoconnect on start-up —When this option is selected, the thin client automatically connects the session on start-up.
d.
Reconnect after disconnect —When this option is selected, the thin client automatically reconnects to a session after a non operator-initiated disconnect. The wait interval is the value that you set in the Delay before reconnecting box
(enter the number of s 1–3600). The default is 20 s if you are a stand-alone user.
4. Click the logon tab to view Logging on area .
You can view Login Username , Password , Domain name , and Logon Mode .
5. Click the Options tab, and do the following: a.
Autoconnect to local devices —Select any options—Printers, Serials, Smart Cards, Sound, and Disks—to have the thin client automatically connect to the devices.
NOTE: USB devices that are connected are managed in Global Connection Settings .
b.
Audio Quality —From the drop-down list, select your preferred audio quality.
c.
Enable session reliability —When enabled, session reliability allows you to momentarily lose connection to the server without having to re-authenticate upon regaining a connection. Instead of the connection time-out, the session is kept alive on the server and is made available to the client upon regaining connectivity. Session reliability is most relevant for wireless devices.
6. Click OK to save your settings.
Using multiple displays in a Citrix session
ThinOS supports ICA desktop multiple displays in Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops/Citrix Virtual Apps 7.6 and later versions.
Prerequisites
● Increase the value of MaxVideoMemoryBytes REG_DWORD to support one or more 4K resolution displays. For more information, see the Citrix documentation at support.citrix.com
.
● Increase the display memory limit to support more color depth and higher resolution. For more information, see the Citrix documentation at citrix.com
.
Steps
1. Connect multiple displays to ThinOS device.
2. Go to System Setup > Display , disable Mirror Mode , and configure the display layout.
3. Launch an ICA desktop. By default, the ICA desktop is launched in the full-screen mode.
Configuring connection brokers 83
Table 25. Display details
Platforms
Wyse 5070 Extended Thin
Client
Best Display resolution Maximum number of system displays
Standard or RDS desktop—
Windows 10, 2012 R2, and 2016
HDX 3D Pro desktop—
Windows 10 with NVIDIA
TESLA P40 GPU
1920 x 1080 6 4
2560 x 1440
3840 x 2160
6
4
4
4
Wyse 5070 Thin Client—
Pentium processor
Wyse 5070 Thin Client—
Celeron processor
5120 x 1440
1920 x 1080
2560 x 1440
3840 x 2160
5120 x 1440
1920 x 1080
2560 x 1440
3840 x 2160
5120 x 1440
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4. Move the display blocks as per your requirement.
NOTE: For more information about the Citrix official multiple displays support, see the Citrix documentation at support.citrix.com
.
USB Printer Redirection
Prerequisites
Go to Citrix Studio, and enable the Client USB device redirection policy.
About this task
This section describes how to configure USB Printer Redirection in a Citrix session.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS desktop, open the Connection Manager window, and click Global Connection Settings .
The Global Connection Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Clear the Exclude printer devices check box, and click OK .
3. Connect a USB printer to the thin client.
4. Log in to a Citrix session.
5. Go to Control Panel > Devices and Printer , and verify if the printer driver is automatically installed.
After the printer drive installation is complete, the redirected printer is listed in the Printers section.
Configure the Citrix UPD printer
Use of Citrix Universal Print Driver (Citrix UPD) ensures that all printers that are connected to the thin client can also be used from a virtual desktop or application session without integrating a new printer driver in the data center. Citrix UPD is the base of
Citrix Universal Printer. It is an autocreated printer object that uses the Citrix UPD and is not tied to any specific printer defined on the client.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Citrix UPD usage on your thin client.
84 Configuring connection brokers
Steps
1. Connect a printer to the ThinOS client.
2. On the ThinOS desktop menu, do the following: a. Open the Connection Manager window.
b. Click Global Connection Settings .
c. Go to the Session tab and select the Exclude printer devices check box.
d. Click OK .
3. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer Setup .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the name of the printer in the Printer Name box.
5. Enter any string of the Printer identification in the Printer Identification box.
6. Select the type of the printer class from the drop-down list, select the check box to enable the printer device, and click OK .
NOTE: In ThinOS 9.1, only PS class is supported.
7. Start a Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops application connection.
8. Open the Devices and Printers in the desktop or application. The printer is mapped as the UPD printer by default.
Next steps
To enable the printer server policies for Citrix UPD printer, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Configure the device-specific printer driver
Based on the Citrix Host Printer Policy settings, ThinOS supports device-specific printer drivers. This method allows Citrix hosts to automatically create client redirected printer queues based on the peripheral management printers settings of the ThinOS client. The host print manager uses the printer name and the printer ID to automatically create the printer queues.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the device-specific printer driver usage on your ThinOS client.
Steps
1. Connect a printer to the ThinOS client.
2. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
3. On the ThinOS desktop menu, do the following: a. Open the Connection Manager window.
b. Click Global Connection Settings .
c. Go to the Session tab and select the Exclude printer devices check box.
d. Click OK .
4. Enter the name of the printer in the Printer Name box.
5. Enter the specific printer driver identification that has been installed on the remote session
6. Select the check box to enable the printer device, and click OK .
NOTE: In ThinOS 9.1, only printer driver type 3 is supported.
7. Start a Citrix virtual connection.
8. Open the Devices and Printers in the desktop or application. The printer is mapped to the session.
Export Citrix Workspace App logs
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Tools .
Configuring connection brokers 85
2. Click the Packages tab.
Figure 26. Packages tab
3. Select Citrix Workspace App , and click Advanced .
86 Configuring connection brokers
Figure 27. Package Advanced window
The Package Advanced window is displayed.
4. Click Configure Log.
The Citrix Log Preferences window is displayed.
Configuring connection brokers 87
Figure 28. Citrix Log Preferences window
5. Right-click the classes that you require, and select Verbose .
6. Select the check boxes to select specific log items.
Click Set All Enabled to select all the check boxes.
7. Enter the file name and the output file pat in the Log Output Path field.
The default path is var/log/ICAClient.log
. Dell Technologies recommends using the default log output path.
8. Click Apply Changes and close the Citrix Log Preferences window.
9. Connect the ICA session, reproduce the scenario that you require the log from, and disconnect the ICA session .
10. From the desktop menu, click System Tools .
11. Click the Packages tab.
88 Configuring connection brokers
Figure 29. Packages tab
12. Select Citrix Workspace App , and click Advanced .
Configuring connection brokers 89
Figure 30. Package Advanced window
The Package Advanced window is displayed.
13. Connect a USB drive that is formatted with the FAT32 file allocation.
14. Enter a log password of your choice in the Set zip file password field.
15. Click Export Log .
The logs are now exported successfully to the USB drive.
Next steps
1. Reopen the Citrix Log Preferences window by performing the following steps: a. From the desktop menu, click System Tools .
b. Click the Packages tab.
c. Select Citrix Workspace App , and click Advanced .
The Package Advanced window is displayed.
d. Click Configure Log .
The Citrix Log Preferences window is displayed.
2. Click both the Set All Default buttons.
3. Click the Load Default button.
4. Click Apply Changes .
The Citrix Workspace Log capture is disabled.
90 Configuring connection brokers
Configure multifarm
In ThinOS 9.1, multifarm works with only a Citrix Broker agent. You cannot use multifarm with other connection brokers.
Steps
1. Log in to the Wyse Management Suite server.
2. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select your preferred group.
3. Click Edit Policies > ThinOS 9.x
.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Expand Broker Settings , and click Global Broker Settings .
6. Enable MultiFarm .
7. Click Save & Publish .
8. Check in the thin client to WMS group, and restart the thin client.
9. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
10. Go to the Broker Setup tab, and enter the multi broker server in the Broker Server field.
For example, https://broker1,https://broker2 .
11. You can now log in to multi server with one user.
NOTE: If there is a server logon failure due to invalid credentials when you enable Multifarm and MultiDomain, the logon continues. If there is no failure, logon exits immediately.
Configure multilogon
In ThinOS 9.1, multilogon works with only a Citrix Broker agent. You cannot use multilogon with other connection brokers.
Steps
1. Log in to the Wyse Management Suite server.
2. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select your preferred group.
3. Click Edit Policies > ThinOS 9.x
.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Expand Broker Settings , and click Global Broker Settings .
6. Enable MultiLogon .
7. Click Save & Publish .
8. Check in the thin client to WMS group, and restart the thin client.
9. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
10. Go to the Broker Setup tab, and enter the multi broker server in the Broker Server field.
For example, https://broker1,https://broker2 .
11. You can now log in to multi server with two different users.
Configuring VMware
VMware virtualization enables you to run multiple virtual machines on a single physical machine. VMware Horizon Client is a locally installed software application that communicates between View Connection Server and the thin client operating system.
It provides access to centrally hosted virtual desktops from your thin clients.
In every ThinOS release, the Horizon Client version may be updated to newer version. For information about the latest Horizon
Client version and the known issues, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
NOTE: If you are upgrading your thin client to the latest ThinOS version, you must ensure that the Horizon server or agent version is updated to support the latest horizon client version. For more information about the client and server/agent version compatibility, see the VMware Product Interoperability Matrices page at www.vmware.com
.
Configuring connection brokers 91
Configure the VMware broker connection
About this task
This section describes how to configure the VMware broker setup on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Broker Setup tab, select VMware Horizon from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, and do the following:
● Broker Server —Enter the IP address/Hostname/FQDN of the broker server.
● Auto Connect List —Enter the name of the desktops that you want to launch automatically after logging in to the respective broker. You can enter multiple desktop names. Each desktop name is separated by semicolon, and is casesensitive.
● Security mode —Select the preferred security mode from the following options:
○ Full —Full Security requires an FQDN address with a domain certificate.
○ Warning —Warn Security requires an FQDN address with a self-signed certificate, or without any certificate. But the corresponding warning message is displayed for user to continue.
○ Low —Security allows an FQDN or IP address with or without a certificate.
● Connection Protocol —From the drop-down list, select the type of protocol connection. By default, the option is set to
Server Default .
NOTE: The PCoIP only connection protocol is applicable only to PCoIP clients. If you do not install the Teradici
PCoIP package, then the PCoIP protocol option is not available.
The available options are:
○ Server default —Select this protocol connection to display the desktop with default protocol as configured in the
VMware View Admin console, for each pool in the broker. If a desktop pool is configured with default protocol as RDP in the View Admin console, then only the RDP connection of the desktop is displayed in ThinOS after users sign in to the device.
○ All Supported —Select this protocol connection to display the desktop in all the available connections. This is applicable when a desktop pool is configured to allow users to select the protocol as yes . If the desktop is configured with default protocol as PCoIP and allow user to select protocol as no , then ThinOS only displays the desktop in the
PCoIP connection.
○ RDP only —Select this protocol connection to display the desktop in RDP connection only. If a desktop pool is configured with default protocol as PCoIP in the View Admin console, and allow users to select the protocol as no , then this desktop is not displayed in ThinOS after user signs in to the device.
○ PCoIP only —This option is available only for PCoIP enabled clients. Select this protocol connection to display only the desktop in the PCoIP connection, for each pool in the broker. If a desktop pool is configured with default protocol as RDP in the View Admin console, and allow user to select the protocol as no , then this desktop is not displayed in
ThinOS after user signs in to the device.
○ Blast only —VMware Blast display protocol can be used for remote applications and for remote desktops that use virtual machines or shared-session desktops on an RDS host. Select this protocol connection to display the desktop with the Blast protocol.
● Log in anonymously using Unauthenticated Access —Select this check box to anonymously log in to the VMware session with application remoting.
3. Click OK to save the settings.
VMware Real Time Audio-Video
About this task
Use the Real-Time Audio-Video feature to run Skype and other online conference applications on the remote desktop. Both audio and video devices that are connected to your thin client can be used for VoIP in a remote desktop.
To know more about the VMware Real Time Audio-Video support, go to pubs.vmware.com
.
NOTE: There is no additional configuration for ThinOS.
92 Configuring connection brokers
To validate the VMware Real Time Audio-Video, do the following:
Steps
1. Connect to the VMware PCoIP or Blast desktop with the audio and video devices.
NOTE: USB redirection must be disabled for the audio and video devices.
2. Verify the audio playback of the system using the VMware virtual audio.
3. Verify the system audio recording using the VMware virtual microphone.
4. Verify the audio settings in VoIP application.
5. Verify the video settings in VoIP application using the VMware virtual webcam.
6. Start the audio or video calls.
Enable Scanner Redirection
Scanner Redirection feature enables you to scan information from VDI desktops using scanning and imaging devices that are connected to your thin client. Scanner Redirection supports standard scanning and imaging devices that are compatible with
TWAIN, Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and Scanner Access Now Easy (SANE) formats. The scanner redirection feature is applicable only for Blast sessions.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the Scanner Redirection feature is installed in the VMware Horizon session. You must select this feature in the
VMware Horizon Agent wizard during the Horizon agent installation.
Steps
1. Log in to the ThinOS client.
2. From the system menu, click Admin Policy Tool .
3. In the Advanced tab, click Broker & Session , and expand VMware Broker Settings .
4. Configure the following options based on your preference:
● If the Scanner Class ID starts with 06, click the Allow USB Imaging Family Device (Scanner) Redirection toggle switch to enable the Scanner Redirection feature.
● If the Scanner Class ID does not start with 06, enter the Scanner VID and PID in the format vid-xxxx_pid-yyyy in the Exclude Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field.
5. Click Save & Publish .
6. Launch the Horizon View desktop on ThinOS.
7. Open the VMware Scanner Redirection menu from the Windows system tray.
The available scanners are listed and can be selected based on your preference.
Enable Serial Port Redirection
Serial Port redirection feature enables you to redirect serial (COM) ports such as integrated RS232 ports or USB ports that are connected locally to serial adapters. You can connect the serial devices to serial ports on your thin client and then use the serial devices in VDI desktops. The serial port redirection feature is applicable only for Blast sessions.
NOTE: ThinOS 9.1 supports the Serial Port Redirection feature only on the Wyse 5070 Thin Client and the Wyse 5070
Extended Thin Client.
To use the Serial Port Redirection feature, you must install the feature in the VMware Horizon session. This feature is installed in the VMware Horizon Agent during the Horizon Agent installation. After the Serial Port Redirection feature is enabled in the VDI session, do the following:
1. Launch a Horizon View desktop on ThinOS.
2. Open the VMware Serial Port Redirection menu from the Windows system tray.
The available serial ports are listed and can be selected based on your preference. In Windows Device Manager, the serial port is displayed as Serial Port Redirection over VMware Horizon (COM1) .
Configuring connection brokers 93
Enable Session Collaboration
Session Collaboration redirection feature enables you to invite other users to join your remote desktop session. The session collaboration feature is applicable only for Blast sessions.
NOTE: You cannot accept the invitation and join the remote desktop session of other users. This is a limitation on ThinOS
9.1.
By default, the session collaboration feature is enabled in the VMware session. To invite a user to join your desktop session, do the following:
1. Launch a Horizon View desktop on ThinOS.
2. Click the VMware Session Collaboration icon from the Windows system tray.
3. Enter the username or email address and click Send .
Enable Battery State Redirection
Battery State Redirection feature enables you to redirect the battery information of the ThinOS device to a remote desktop.
To use the Battery State Redirection feature, you must ensure that the Enable Battery State Redirection Agent Policy
Setting is enabled in Group Policy Management Editor. By default, this feature is enabled. The battery state redirection feature is applicable only for Blast sessions.
Relative mouse
When you enable the relative mouse feature, Horizon Client uses relative coordinates to transmit data about the mouse pointer movement and improve the mouse performance. The relative mouse feature is applicable for both PCoIP and Blast-enabled thin clients.
NOTE: The touch screen may not work when the relative mouse feature is enabled. This is a VMware limitation.
Enable relative mouse using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, start Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click either Blast Session Settings or PCoIP Session Settings based on your preference.
3. Click the Enable Relative Mouse when launching session toggle key to enable the relative mouse feature.
4. Click Save & Publish .
NOTE: To disable the relative mouse feature, press Ctrl+ Alt key combination in a Blast session or press Ctrl +Alt+Down key combination in a PCoIP session.
Enable relative mouse using session menu
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, launch a PCoIP session or a Blast session.
2. In the system tray, click the PCoIP icon to view the active PCoIP sessions, or click the VMware icon to view the active Blast sessions.
3. Select a session from the menu.
4. Enable Relative Mouse .
NOTE: To disable the relative mouse feature, press Ctrl+ Alt key combination in a Blast session or press Ctrl +Alt+Down key combination in a PCoIP session.
94 Configuring connection brokers
Configure Workspace ONE Mode
VMware Workspace ONE mode enables you to connect to remote desktops and applications through the Workspace ONE Web
Portal. As a Horizon administrator, you can enable the Workspace ONE mode on a Connection Server instance. Horizon Client users are redirected to a Workspace ONE server to launch their remote desktops and applications.
Steps
1. Open the VMware Connection Server console.
2. Go to Settings > Servers > Connection Server and click the Authentication tab.
3. From the Delegation of authentication to VMware Horizon (SAML 2.0 Authentication) drop-down list, select
Required .
4. Click Manage SAML Authenticators to add your Authenticator.
5. Select the Enable Workspace ONE mode check box.
6. Enter the Workspace ONE Server hostname and click OK .
7. Log in to the ThinOS client.
8. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
9. In the Broker Setup tab, select VMware Horizon from the Select Broker Type drop-down list.
10. Enter the server URL in the Broker Server field.
11. Click OK and restart the thin client.
The VMware Workspace ONE login window is displayed.
12. Enter the user credentials and click Sign In .
NOTE: The ThinOS lock terminal is not supported in Workspace ONE Mode. When you attempt to lock the terminal, a warning message is displayed prompting for automatic sign-off. Click Continue if you want to sign out from the session.
NOTE: The Remember this setting option in Workspace ONE web portal is not supported due to the customized browser limitation.
Unified Access Gateway
ThinOS supports Unified Access Gateway (UAG) that is used to securely access remote desktops and applications that are outside a corporate firewall. For information about the latest version of Unified Access Gateway, see Unified Access Gateway
Documentation at docs.vmware.com
.
VMware Horizon 7.11 with Unified Access Gateway 3.8 and later uses SAML-based multifactor authentication. It supports many modern cloud-based solutions including the Azure multifactor authentication.
Configure Unified Access Gateway on ThinOS
Prerequisites
● Configure the Unified Access Gateway (UAG) setting on the server side. For more information about configuring the server-side settings for UAG, see the VMware Unified Access Gateway documentation at docs.vmware.com
.
● Open the connection server admin page, and specify the UAG information in the following sections:
○ HTTP(s) Secure Tunnel
○ PCoIP Secure Gateway
○ Blast Secure Gateway
Steps
1. Start the ThinOS client.
2. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
3. On the Broker Setup tab, select VMware Horizon from the Select Broker Type drop-down list.
4. In the Broker Server field, enter the Unified Access Gateway URL.
Configuring connection brokers 95
5. Click OK .
Configure Microsoft Azure Multifactor authentication with VMware Unified
Access Gateway
Prerequisites
Configure the Unified Access Gateway (UAG) settings and Azure Multifactor authentication settings on the server side. For more information about configuring the server-side settings, see the Microsoft Azure MFA with VMware UAG documentation at docs.vmware.com
.
Steps
1. Start the ThinOS client.
2. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
3. On the Broker Setup tab, select VMware Horizon from the Select Broker Type drop-down list.
4. In the Broker Server field, enter the Unified Access Gateway FQDN.
5. Click OK .
6. On the Azure Sign In window, enter the Azure account.
7. Click Next .
8. Enter the password to log in to the session.
NOTE: ThinOS does not support Single Sign-On (SSO) to Azure MFA with VMware UAG.
Configure the VMware integrated printing settings
About this task
The VMware Integrated Printing feature allows you to print to a local or network printer without installing additional printer drivers in the remote desktop. The USB redirection feature enables you to print from a remote desktop using a USB printer that is connected to the local client device. For each printer configured locally on ThinOS, you must map the printer to the VMware
Blast desktop. ThinOS Blast printer mapping is equivalent to VMware client printer redirection.
Currently ThinOS supports only PS printer in blast session since VMware has removed Thin print support from VMware Horizon
8.0 and VMware Horizon Client 2006.
To map your printer, do the following:
NOTE: LPT printer is considered as an example to explain the printer mapping scenario. Printer mapping in ThinOS works similar to LPT for LPD and SMB printers.
Steps
1. Power on the ThinOS client with the VMware View broker configured in the Broker Setup tab.
2. Set the connection protocol as All Supported from the Connection Protocol drop-down list.
3. Go to Global Connection Settings > Session , and retain the Exclude printer devices check box selection. This option is selected by default.
4. Plug in a USB printer to the ThinOS client terminal.
5. Go to System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Printer Setup dialog box, do the following: a. From the Select Port drop-down list, select LPT 1 .
b. Enter valid printer name and printer identification.
c. Select the Enable the printer device check box.
d. Click OK to save the configuration.
7. Click the Options tab, and do the following: a. Set LPT1: <Printername> as default printer.
96 Configuring connection brokers
b. Click OK to save the configuration.
8. Connect to a VMware Blast session and go to Control Panel > Devices and Printers .
The printer that is configured locally in ThinOS is mapped to the session. The mapped printer’s driver is VMWARE
POSTSCRIPT Driver and the port is VMWPORT.
The VMware Integrated Printing feature allows the ThinOS local printer to be mapped to the VMware Blast session without installing the printer driver in the session.
Configure the USB Printer Redirection in VMware Blast and PCoIP session
Steps
1. Connect a USB printer to the ThinOS client.
2. Go to Global Connection Settings > Session and clear the Exclude printer devices check box. This option is selected by default.
3. Log in to a Blast or a PCoIP session.
4. Go to Control Panel > Devices and Printer and verify if the printer driver is automatically installed.
After the printer driver installation is complete, the redirected printer is listed in the Printers section.
Wacom tablet support on ThinOS
ThinOS supports Wacom Intuos pen tablets that can be used for a wide range of activities such as drawing and sketching. You must use the Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool to configure the Wacom tablet mode. The tablet model that is tested on ThinOS is Intous Pro M .
NOTE: Wacom Tablet does not work in a Horizon PCoIP session.
For information about limitations, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
Enable Wacom tablet using the session menu
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, launch a PCoIP session.
2. In system tray, click the PCoIP icon to view the active PCoIP sessions.
3. Select a session from the menu.
4. Click Tablet Monitor and select one or more displays. The selected display is mapped to the tablet.
Table 26. Tablet Monitor settings
User scenario ThinOS settings
Map all displays to the tablet.
Click the PCoIP icon, and then click PCoIP session > Table Monitor > Full .
Map a specified display to the tablet.
Click the PCoIP icon, and then click PCoIP session > Table Monitor > Monitor (x) .
Recommended PCoIP session settings a. In a PCoIP session, open the Wacom tablet properties window.
b. Click the Mapping tab.
c. From the Screen Area drop-down list, select Full .
a. In a PCoIP session, open the Wacom tablet properties window.
b. Click the Mapping tab.
c. From the Screen Area drop-down list, select your preferred display.
5. Click Tablet Orientation Left-Handed to set the orientation of the tablet for left-handed use. If enabled, a tick mark is displayed next to the option. The orientation setting applies to all tools and applications. You must rotate your tablet either to the left or to the right based on your selected orientation.
Configuring connection brokers 97
Table 27. Tablet Orientation settings
User scenario
Right-handed tablet orientation.
ThinOS settings
● Click the PCoIP icon and select the PCoIP session.
● Clear the Tablet Orientation Left-
Handed selection.
Recommended PCoIP session settings a. In a PCoIP session, open the Wacom tablet properties window.
b. Click the Mapping tab.
c. From the Orientation drop-down list, select ExpressKeys Left .
Left-handed tablet orientation.
● Click the PCoIP icon and select the PCoIP session.
● Select the Tablet Orientation Left-
Handed option.
a. In a PCoIP session, open the Wacom tablet properties window.
b. Click the Mapping tab.
c. From the Orientation drop-down list, select ExpressKeys Right .
Next steps
.
Configure the Wacom tablet mode
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have enabled the Wacom tablet feature in the session menu. See,
Enable Wacom tablet using the session menu
.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, start Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click PCoIP Session Settings .
3. From the Wacom Tablet Configurations drop-down list, select either of the following modes:
● Locally terminated —Enables the peripheral data to be processed locally at the thin client. Locally terminated tablets have greatly improved responsiveness, and tolerate network with 25 milliseconds and higher latency.
● Bridged —Enables the peripheral data to be sent to the desktop for processing. Bridged Wacom tablets are supported only in low-latency environments. Reduced responsiveness is observed in network environments with greater than
25-millisecond latency.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Next steps
1. Connect the tablet to the thin client.
2. Open the Wacom Desktop Center application in the session.
3. Verify the tablet connection.
Configuring PCoIP connections using Teradici Remote Workstation card
ThinOS enables you to directly configure the PCoIP connection using either the TERA2240 Remote Workstation Card or
TERA2220 Remote Workstation Card. This feature is supported only on PCoIP-enabled thin clients. This feature only works with the direct PCoIP connection.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you install or upgrade Teradici Host Software to 20.04.0.413 or later versions.
● Ensure that host cards are connected to a remote workstation.
● Ensure that host cards are installed correctly, that is, connected to a remote workstation with GPU.
98 Configuring connection brokers
NOTE: The SDK in ThinOS does not function similar to Teradici zero client firmware. For example, the SDK in ThinOS does not support USB redirection and Relative Mouse features with the host card connection. This feature is mainly for workstation users working on the server remotely.
Steps
1. On ThinOS desktop, go to Connect Manager .
2. Click New , and then click PCoIP .
3. In the Connection Settings (PCoIP) dialog box, do the following: a. Enter the description for the PCoIP connection.
b. Enter the IP address of the remote host card.
c. From the Display Resolution drop-down list, select a display resolution for the PCoIP connection.
TERA2220 supports a single display with 2560 x 1600 resolution or two displays with 1920 x 1080 resolution. TERA2240 supports two displays with 2560 x 1600 resolution, four displays with 1920 x 1080 resolution, or a single display with 3840 x 2160 resolution.
d. Select either the Window mode or Full screen to set the initial view of the session.
e. If you want to automatically connect to the session after you restart the thin client, select the Auto-connect on start-up check box.
f. Select the Re-connect after disconnect check box if you want to automatically reconnect to a session after the session is disconnected. If you select this option, enter the wait interval in the Delay before re-connecting box. The default is 20 seconds.
4. Click OK to save your settings.
For information about the Teradici host cards, see the Host Card documentation at www.teradici.com
.
Configuring Windows Virtual Desktop
Windows Virtual Desktop is a comprehensive desktop and app virtualization service that runs on the cloud. You can access the
Windows Virtual Desktop resources that are created on Azure cloud from the ThinOS client.
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have an Azure Active Directory configured and Windows Virtual Desktop resources are deployed on the Azure cloud.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Windows Virtual Desktop broker setup on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, select Windows Virtual Desktop from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, and do the following: a. Select the Enable Windows Virtual Desktop check box to configure the Windows Virtual Desktop settings.
b. Select the Enable Workspace (MS-Prod) check box if you want to connect to a Workspace using the non-Azure
Resource Manager (ARM) based URL. Specify the following details:
● Client ID
● Redirect URL
● Resource URL
● Feed URL c. Select the Enable Workspace (ARMv2) check box if you want to connect to a Workspace using the Azure Resource
Manager (ARM)-based URL. Specify the following details:
● Client ID
● Redirect URL
● Resource URL
● Feed URL
Configuring connection brokers 99
3. In the Remote Connections dialog box, click the General Options tab, and specify the Azure cloud user credentials.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
5. Restart the thin client.
6. In the login window, click Enter .
7. Enter the Azure cloud user password.
8. Click Sign in .
The desktops and applications on Azure cloud are displayed.
Log in to Windows Virtual Desktop using Active
Directory Federation Services
Prerequisites
You can now use your Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) server login to join the on-premises Active Directory with the Azure Active Directory.
● Ensure that you have created an Azure Active Directory.
● Ensure that you have a public domain name.
● Ensure that you have created the on-premises Active Directory.
● Ensure that you have ADFS and Azure AD Connect tools.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Broker Setup tab, select Windows Virtual Desktop from the Select Broker Type drop-down list.
100 Configuring connection brokers
Figure 31. Windows Virtual Desktop drop-down
3. Select the Enable Windows Virtual Desktop check box.
4. Click OK and restart the thin client.
5. Enter the username of the on-premises Active Directory, and click Next on the Windows Virtual Desktop login window.
6. Enter the credentials of the on-premises Active Directory, and click OK on the ADFS window.
7. Launch the Windows Virtual Desktop session.
Configuring connection brokers 101
Configuring Microsoft Remote Desktop Services
Microsoft Remote Desktop application allows you to access and manage the data and resources of a remote device using an internet connection. ThinOS supports RC4_HMAC_MD5 for RDP connections to compliment with AES128_HMAC_SHA1 or
AES256_HMAC_SHA1.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Microsoft Remote Desktop Services on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Broker Setup tab, select Microsoft Remote Desktop Service from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, and do the following:
● Broker Server —Enter the IP address, hostname, or FQDN of the Broker Server.
● Auto Connect List —Enter the name of the desktops that you want to launch automatically after logging in to the respective broker. More than one desktop can be entered. Each desktop name is separated by semi-colon, and is case-sensitive.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Enable Terminal Services Gateway
Terminal Services Gateway (TS Gateway) provides a secure access to a remote desktop. In a TS Gateway II or III connection, the setup uses a two half-duplex communication between the Terminal Server (TS) Gateway server and the thin client. In the
WebSocket connection, the session connection setup uses a duplex communication between TS Gateway and thin client. TS
Gateway II and TS Gateway III are downward compatible with Windows Server 2016, that means, if the WebSocket connection fails or the TS Gateway server or thin client version does not support WebSocket, then TS Gateway II or TS Gateway III is used.
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite or open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS.
2. In the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click RDP and WVD Session Settings .
3. Click the Enable Remote Desktop Services Gateway toggle switch to enable TS Gateway for your connection.
4. Click Save & Publish .
5. Log in to the RDS or WVD Broker agent.
6. Launch the RDS or WVD session.
TS Gateway connection is established.
Table 28. Supported TS Gateway versions
Server operating system TS Gateway II
Windows Server 2008 R2 Support
Windows Server 2012 R2
Windows Server 2016
Support
Support
TS Gateway III
Not support
Support
Support
WebSocket
Not Support
Not Support
Support
Configure the Remote Desktop Services collection
ThinOS enables you to access the Remote Desktop Services session collection that is configured on the RDS Broker agent.
RDSH collection enables you to group all the desktops and applications that you want to publish.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
102 Configuring connection brokers
2. In the Advanced tab, expand Broker Settings , and click Microsoft Remote Desktop Settings .
3. In the RDSH collections field, specify the collections that are configured on the RDS Broker agent. Only the applications and desktops within the specified collections are displayed. If the field is empty, all the applications and desktops are displayed.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Add a Remote Desktop Protocol connection
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click RDP and WVD Session Settings .
3. Click Add Row in the RDP Direct connection collection section.
4. Specify the Remote Desktop Protocol connection details.
You can automatically connect to a Remote Desktop Protocol connection on system startup by enabling the Auto Connect button. Alternatively, you can go to Add Connection > Add RDP Connection > Connection from the VDI menu, and select the Auto-connect on start-up check box to connect RDP automatically on system startup.
Configuring connection brokers 103
104
Figure 32. Auto-connect on start-up
Configuring connection brokers
NOTE: For the auto connect feature to function, the Save local connections option in Advanced > Session Settings
> Global Session Settings must be enabled.
5. Click Save & Publish .
Log in to RDP session using Remote Desktop Gateway
Steps
1. Go to Add Connection > Add RDP connection > Logon from the VDI menu.
Configuring connection brokers 105
106
Figure 33. Use RD Gateway
Configuring connection brokers
2. Select the Use RD Gateway check box.
3. Specify the credentials for Remote Desktop Gateway.
4. Click OK to save the settings.
Configuring the Amazon WorkSpaces broker connection
Amazon WorkSpace (AWS) is a cloud-based virtual desktop that allows you to access remote applications with ease. Amazon
WorkSpaces connection is applicable only for PCoIP clients.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Broker Setup tab, from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, select Amazon WorkSpaces .
3. Based on your preferred connection mode, do the following:
● If you want to connect to AWS using the registration code, select the Connect via registration code check box, and enter the WorkSpaces registration code in the Registration Code field. If you want to change the registration code from the Amazon Workspace login window, you must select the Enable Changing Registration Code from Login window option using either Admin policy tool or Wyse Management Suite.
● If your server supports Multi-factor authentication (MFA), enable the MFA option using Wyse Management Suite or
Admin Policy Tool.
The MFA token field is enabled. Use the Google Authenticator on your mobile device and enter the code that is generated.
● If you want to connect to AWS using the default PCoIP Gateway mode, enter the IP address/Hostname/FQDN of the broker server in the Broker Server field.
● If you select the Enable customized login option in Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite, the Amazon
Workspace customized login window is displayed.
4. In the Auto Connect List field, enter the name of the desktops that you want to launch automatically after logging in to the respective broker. More than one desktop can be listed. Each desktop name is separated by a semicolon, and is case-sensitive.
5. Click OK
For information about deploying Amazon WorkSpaces, see the AWS documentation at docs.aws.amazon.com
.
Teradici PCoIP licensing
The thin client security key value determines the Teradici PCoIP configurations on ThinOS.
Table 29. ThinOS PCoIP licensing
Security key value
Thin client with a security key value that is entitled to the PCoIP protocol.
Thin client with a security key value that is not entitled to the PCoIP protocol.
PCoIP configuration
After you upgrade from ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1, brokers that require
PCoIP are supported and PCoIP configurations are allowed in the ThinOS
UI.
After you upgrade from ThinOS 8.6 to ThinOS 9.1, brokers that require
PCoIP are not supported and PCoIP configurations are disabled in the
ThinOS UI.
Configuring connection brokers 107
Configure the Teradici Cloud Access broker connection
Teradici technology enables you to securely access the remote applications using Teradici Cloud Access. You can manage and optimize your ThinOS PCoIP-enabled clients.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup , and then click Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. On the Broker Setup tab, from the Select Broker Type drop-down list, select Teradici Cloud Access , and configure the following options:
Figure 34. Teradici Cloud Access drop-down
● Broker Server —Enter the IP address or FQDN of the Broker agent server.
108 Configuring connection brokers
● Auto Connect List —Enter the name of desktops that you want to start automatically after logging in to the respective
Broker agent. Use a semicolon to separate each desktop name.
NOTE: Field values are case-sensitive.
3. Select Security Mode .
● Full —Fails to connect to servers with unverified TLS/SSL certificates.
● Warning —A warning message is displayed when you try to connect to servers with unverified certificates.
● Low —Allows the connection without any verification.
4. Click OK to save your settings.
Enable ThinOS to check the server certificate common name
ThinOS-based clients check the common name of the server certificate when setting up an SSL connection in full security mode. Use Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS to enable or disable the TLS checker.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. In the Advanced tab, expand Privacy & Security , and click Security Policy .
3. Click the TLS Check CN toggle switch to enable the option.
Enabling the option allows ThinOS client to check the common name of the server certificate when setting up an SSL connection in full security mode. This option is ineffective to SSL connections for VMware View, Amazon WorkSpaces, and VPN. The server certificate common name is verified all the time when setting up SSL connections for VMware View,
Amazon WorkSpaces, and VPN.
NOTE: Use NetBIOS or FQDN values to define an SSL (HTTPS) connection when enabling the TLSCheckCN option.
Enabling the TLSCheckCN option results in SSL connection failure when an IP address is defined.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Bloomberg keyboard support
ThinOS 9.1.2101 supports Bloomberg Keyboard STB 100. The keyboard has two connection methods. One method uses a single
USB cable to the USB port of the system. The second method is to connect dual USB cables to a KVM USB switch.
In a single USB cable connection, the keyboard device ID is vid-1188_pid-9545 . All the six interfaces are under this device
ID.
In the dual USB cable connection, the keyboard device IDs are vid-1188_pid-9525 for one device and vid-1188_pid-9535 for the other five devices.
Configure Bloomberg keyboard in Citrix sessions
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click USB Redirection .
3. Click Add Row in the vUSB Force Redirect section:
● Redirect the entire keyboard into the session—The keyboard feature keys, fingerprint reader, and the KVM Keyboard are redirected into the session.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with a single USB cable, add one row and enter the device ID. For example, enter 0x11889545 to configure the device.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with dual USB cables, add two rows and enter the device IDs. For example, enter 0x11889525 in one row and 0x11889535 in the other.
● Split keyboard and partly redirect into the session—You can redirect the keyboard feature keys, fingerprint reader, or the
KVM Keyboard individually.
Configuring connection brokers 109
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with a single USB cable, add one row and enter the device ID. For example, enter 0x11889545010100 . This configuration means that the interface 010100 is redirected into session and other interfaces are not redirected.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with dual USB cables, add one row and enter the device ID. For example, enter 0x11889545030001 . This configuration means that the interface 030001 is redirected into session and other interfaces are not redirected.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Configure Bloomberg keyboard in PCoIP sessions
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click USB Redirection .
3. Click Add Row in the vUSB Force Redirect section.
The Keyboard Feature keys, fingerprint reader, and the KVM Keyboard are redirected into the session.
● For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with a single USB cable, enter the device ID 0x11889545 to configure the device.
● For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with dual USB cables, add two rows in the vUSB Force Redirect section, enter 0x11889525 in one row and 0x11889535 in the other.
NOTE: PCoIP does not support USB device splitting.
4. Click Save & Publish .
Configure Bloomberg keyboard in VMware Blast sessions
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. In the Advanced tab, click Broker Settings , and expand VMware Broker Settings .
● Redirect the entire keyboard into the session—The keyboard feature keys, fingerprint reader, and the KVM Keyboard are redirected into the session.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with a single USB cable, enter vid-1188_pid-9545 in the Include
Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with dual USB cables, enter vid-1188_pid-9525;vid-1188_pid-9535 in the Include Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field.
● Split keyboard and partly redirect into the session—You can redirect the keyboard feature keys, fingerprint reader, or the
KVM Keyboard individually.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with a single USB cable: a. Enter vid-1188_pid-9545 in the Include Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field.
b. Enable the Allow Auto USB Device Splitting Redirection button.
c. Enter vid-1188_pid-9545(exintf:00;exintf:01;exintf:02) in the Split Vid/Pid Device field.
NOTE: This configuration means that the interfaces 03, 04, and 05 are redirected into session and the other interfaces 00, 01, and 02 are not redirected. 03, 04, and 05 are audio related interfaces. The analog headset from the audio port in Bloomberg keyboard can be redirected into the Blast session.
○ For Bloomberg keyboard that is connected with dual USB cables: a. Enter vid-1188_pid-9535 in the Include Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field.
b. Enable the Allow Auto USB Device Splitting Redirection button.
c. Enter vid-1188_pid-9535(exintf:00;exintf:01) in the Split Vid/Pid Device field.
NOTE: This configuration means that the interfaces 02, 03, and 04 are redirected into session and the other interfaces 00 and 01 are not redirected. 02, 03, and 04 are audio related interfaces. The analog headset from the audio port in Bloomberg keyboard can be redirected into the Blast session.
3. Click Save & Publish .
110 Configuring connection brokers
Bloomberg keyboard limitations
● The Bloomberg keyboard is only supported under redirection.
● Hot plugging the Bloomberg keyboard is not supported. Configure the keyboard before logging in to the Broker agent and launching the session.
● Disconnecting the Bloomberg keyboard cables when it is redirected into session may cause the session to close or the system to randomly reboot.
Configure the Select Group feature to log in to different brokers
Steps
1. Log in to the Wyse Management Suite server.
2. On the Groups & Configs page, click the Default Device Policy Group option.
3. Click .
4. In the Add New Group dialog box, enter the Group Name and Description .
5. Select the This is a ThinOS Select group parent option.
6. Select the group, add some child groups, and set the Group Token .
You can edit the policy in each child group,
7. Set a different Broker agent server in each child group.
8. On the ThinOS client, go to System Setup > Central Configuration .
9. Check in to any child group token, and reboot the thin client.
10. After the thin client restarts, you can select the child group from the login window.
Configuring connection brokers 111
7
Unified Communications optimization with
ThinOS
Unified Communications and Collaboration solution allows real-time video conferencing, instant messaging, and team collaboration that enables you to work together more effectively.
ThinOS supports the following Unified Communications optimization in a VDI environment:
● Skype for Business
● Cisco Jabber
● Cisco Webex Teams
● Cisco Webex Meetings—Only Citrix VDI is supported.
● Microsoft Teams—Only Citrix VDI is supported.
● Zoom
NOTE: When using Citrix Unified Communications on ThinOS, Dell Technologies recommends that you do not use the fallback mode, which is the legacy HDX redirection for webcam and audio. Using the fallback mode consumes more remote desktop resources such as CPU, GPU, RAM, and Network.
NOTE: Tested scenario-Audio and video calling or meeting with three to five users using Citrix Unified Communications on
ThinOS.
NOTE: To use the Citrix Unified communications optimization feature, you must install the Citrix Workspace app package first before installing the unified communications package.
Citrix Unified Communications support on Wyse 3040
Thin Clients
Following features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations:
● Video call or meeting
● Share screen
To avoid audio choppy issues during the audio call or meeting, users are recommended not to perform the following tasks:
● Move the application window frequently or quickly.
● Scroll down the Microsoft PowerPoint slide, Word document, Excel sheet, or a website page frequently or quickly.
● Play a video in an ICA session frequently.
Citrix HDX RealTime Optimization Pack for Skype for
Business
The Citrix HDX RealTime Optimization pack enables you to make high-definition audio and video calls using the Skype for Business application. For more information about HDX RealTime Optimization Pack, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
The Citrix HDX RealTime Optimization pack consists of the following two components:
● HDX RealTime Media Engine and Citrix Workspace app that are integrated as a single component on the client-side (Citrix package)
● HDX RealTime Connector as the server-side component
The HDX RealTime Media Engine and Citrix Workspace app are combined to constitute a single component that runs on the thin client. The HDX RealTime connector is the server-side component that runs on the Citrix Virtual Desktops virtual desktops and
112 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
Citrix Virtual Apps servers. The HDX RealTime connecter that runs on the Citrix server handles the authentication and the media processing is achieved on the thin client.
NOTE: In every ThinOS release, the Citrix package version may be updated to newer versions.
Table 30. Supported environment
Component
Endpoints (Thin clients)
Citrix environment
Skype for Business client
Server backend
Client component at the endpoint
Supported platform/supported versions
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
● Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops 7 1811 and later
● Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops (formerly XenDesktop) 5.6, 6.5, 7.x
● Citrix Virtual Apps (formerly XenApp) 6.5, 7.x
● Skype for Business 2016
● Skype for Business 2015
● Lync 2013
● Lync 2010
● Skype for Business Server 2019
● Skype for Business Server 2015
● Skype for Business Online—Microsoft Office 365 hosted Skype for
Business Server
● Lync 2013 Server
Citrix package for RTME
Install the Citrix Workspace app package on ThinOS
You must install the Citrix Workspace app package to use Skype for Business application on ThinOS. To install the Citrix
.
Set up the Skype for Business application
About this task
This section describes how to install and use Skype for Business (SFB) on a Citrix desktop.
NOTE: Ensure that the thin client does not have USB redirection for video and audio devices to have the RealTime Media
Engine working correctly on your thin client.
Steps
1. Upgrade the ThinOS firmware and install the Citrix package on the thin client using Wyse Management Suite. For more information about firmware upgrade and package installation, see
.
2. Go to www.citrix.com
and download the appropriate version of the Citrix RealTime Optimization Pack that contains the
Citrix HDX RealTime Connector.
3. Install the Citrix HDX RealTime Connector on the Citrix Virtual Desktops or Citrix Virtual Apps servers.
NOTE: If you are running an earlier 2.x version, you must upgrade the connector to the latest version.
4. Log in to your Citrix desktop and start the Skype for Business application.
Using the Skype for Business application
The following are the salient features:
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 113
● Supports Native Skype For Business client menus and operations
● Supports more call features, such as call delegation, and response group
● Supports video codec H.264-UC and audio codec SILK
● Supports Call Admission Control
● Supports DSCP/QoS Configuration
● Supports Bandwidth Policy Control
● Ability to turn off version mismatch warnings for acceptable combinations of RealTime Connector and RealTime Media
Engine
● Better initialization to eliminate DNS confusions
For more information about Skype for Business in VDI environments, see the Microsoft documentation at docs.microsoft.com
.
Use the Skype for Business application to perform the following tasks:
● Start an audio or video call.
○ Select a user to call.
○ Call from the IM window.
○ Type a name or number to call.
● Answer the call.
○ Answer an audio call.
○ Answer a video call.
○ Use the headset button to answer the call.
● Transfer call, mute, or hold call.
● Control the video—Pause, end, or Picture-in-Picture (PiP).
● Set the volume levels.
● Use the dial pad.
● Make a conference call.
● Help and Hang up.
● Minimize, maximize, or close the call video window.
● Perform a network health check. Right-click the RTME icon on the taskbar and select Call Statistics to view attributes, such as received packets, sent packets, video frame rate, video resolution, audio codec, and video codec.
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Verify the Skype for Business connection status
About this task
This section describes how to verify the Skype for Business status on your thin client.
Steps
1. Install the correct connector on the Citrix Virtual Desktop or Virtual Apps Server.
2. Install the Citrix package on the ThinOS device.
3. Connect the audio or video devices.
NOTE: Disable the USB redirection for audio or video devices.
4. Connect to a Citrix desktop and start the Skype for Business application.
5. Check the RTOP (bow-tie) icon in the system tray on the taskbar of the virtual desktop.
6. Open the About page from the RTOP icon in the system tray and verify the connection attributes.
If the remote RealTime Media Engine version matches the mediaEngine.Net
version, the status is displayed as
Connected .
7. Verify the Settings option from the RealTime connector icon.
8. Verify the audio and video devices from the Skype For Business client menus.
9. Establish the video and audio calls.
10. Answer the calls by either clicking the mouse or using the headset button.
11. Click the RealTime connector icon and verify the call statistics.
114 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
For more information about verifying your installation and the collecting troubleshooting information, see the Citrix documentation at docs.citrix.com
.
Citrix RTME call statistics
Table 31. Citrix RTME call statistics
Platform name RTME version Call statistics*
Video resolution Video codec
Wyse 5470 All-in-
One Thin Client
2.9
960 x 540 H.264-UC (SW)
1280 x 720
Video frame rate
30 fps
H.264-UC (CAM) 30 fps
Wyse 5470 Thin
Client
Wyse 5070 Thin
Client
Wyse 3040 Thin
Client
2.9
2.9
2.9
960 x 540
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
848 x 480
H.264-UC (SW) 30 fps
H.264-UC (CAM) 30 fps
H.264-UC (CAM) 30 fps
H.264-UC (CAM) 30 fps
Camera
Onboard camera
Logitech C930e
Onboard camera
Logitech C930e
Logitech C930e
Logitech C930e
*The call statistics data is displayed in the Call Statistics window in the Sent column.
VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for
Business
The VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business enables you to use Skype for Business in a VMware Horizon desktop. Microsoft Skype for Business is a unified communications platform that delivers an optimized user experience for online messaging, audio, and video calling and so on.
ThinOS supports VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business in a Blast session only. PCoIP and RDP protocols do not support this feature.
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations
Install the Horizon package on ThinOS
You must install the Horizon package to use Skype for Business application in a VMware desktop on ThinOS. To install the
.
Setting up the Skype for Business in VMware Blast session
About this task
This section describes how to install and use the Microsoft Skype for Business (SFB) on a VMware Blast desktop.
Steps
1. Log in as horizon administrator, and start the VMware Horizon Agent installation on the virtual desktop.
2. During the VMware Horizon Agent installation, select the VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business option to install the VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for SFB.
For Horizon Agent installation information, see the Setting Up Virtual Desktops in Horizon 7 document at docs.vmware.com
.
The VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business contains the following components:
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 115
● Horizon Media Proxy—This component is installed on the virtual desktop.
● Horizon Media Provider—This component is installed on the thin client.
3. Install the Skype for Business application on the VMware Blast desktop.
4. Update the ThinOS firmware, and install the Horizon Package on the ThinOS client.
5. On ThinOS, log in to the VMware Blast desktop, and sign in to Skype for Business.
Next steps
To verify if the VMware Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business is installed on the deployed virtual machines, check if the following registry keys exist:
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Office\Lync\VdiMediaProvider - GUID (REG_SZ)
● HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Office\Lync\VdiMediaProvider - GUID
(REG_SZ)
For information about pairing modes for a session, see the Configuring Skype for Business document at docs.vmware.com
.
For information about configuring Skype for Business group policy settings, see the VMware Virtualization Pack for Skype for
Business Policy Settings document at docs.vmware.com
.
For information about the performance data statistics, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
NOTE: To check the Skype for Business call statistics, right-click the virtualization pack icon on the lower-right of the virtual desktop, and click Call statistics .
Optimized mode and Fallback mode
In Optimized mode , the Skype for Business delivers an optimal performance. In Fallback mode , the Skype For Business calls are not optimized. On the lower right of the virtual desktop, the tooltip of the Virtualization Pack icon indicates the VMware
Horizon Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business mode.
The following screenshot displays the Virtualization pack for Skype for Business in Optimized mode:
Figure 35. Optimized mode
If the Optimized mode icon is not displayed, the Virtualization Pack is running in Fallback mode. This is because of the version mismatch between the Horizon Client on the thin client and the Horizon Agent on virtual desktop.
For information about compatibility of Horizon Virtualization Pack for SFB components, see the Horizon Client 4.8 or later and
Agent 7.5 or later Virtualization Pack for Skype for Business is not compatible with older Client and Agent releases article at kb.vmware.com
.
Change Optimized mode to Fallback mode
About this task
To change the Optimized mode to Fallback mode, or to disable the Virtualization pack for Skype for Business on the Horizon desktop, do the following:
Steps
1. On the VMware Horizon desktop, open the Windows Registry Editor.
116 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
2. Rename the registry keys based on the following deployment scenarios:
Table 32. Registry keys
Deployment scenario
View Desktops (64-bit) with Skype for Business (64-bit)
View Desktops (64-bit) with Skype for Business (32-bit)
View Desktops (32-bit) with Skype for Business (32-bit)
Registry key
Rename HKLM/Software/Microsoft/Office/Lync/
VdiMediaProvider to HKLM/Software/Microsoft/
Office/Lync/VdiMediaProviderDisabled .
Rename HKLM/Software/Wow6432Node/
Microsoft/Office/Lync/VdiMediaProvider to HKLM/Software/Wow6432Node/Microsoft/
Office/Lync/VdiMediaProviderDisabled .
Rename HKLM/Software/Microsoft/Office/Lync/
VdiMediaProvider to HKLM/Software/Microsoft/
Office/Lync/VdiMediaProviderDisabled .
3. Close the Windows Registry Editor.
4. Restart Skype for Business.
Skype for Business is set to Fallback mode, and Real-Time Audio-Video (RTAV) is used for SFB calls.
Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI
Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI (JVDI) is the Unified Communications solution offered by Cisco for virtual deployments. It supports audio conferencing, and instant messaging on the Hosted Virtual Desktops (HVD). The Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI software offloads the audio processing from the virtual desktop servers to the thin client. All audio and video signals are routed directly between the endpoints without entering the HVD.
Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI enables you to make and receive calls using the Cisco Unified Communications application.
Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI consists of the following two components:
● Cisco JVDI Agent
● Cisco JVDI Client
Cisco JVDI Agent is the JVDI connector that runs on the VDI desktop or server. Cisco JVDI client is the JVDI package that runs on the thin client. The Jabber client that runs on the Citrix server handles the authentication and the media processing is achieved on the thin client.
Table 33. Supported environment
Component
Thin client
Supported platforms/supported versions
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
Connection broker for the hosted virtual desktops ● Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops
● VMware Horizon published desktop
Cisco Jabber 12.9.2
Cisco Jabber application on the hosted virtual desktop
Cisco JVDI agent on the hosted virtual desktop
Cisco JVDI client on the thin client
Cisco JVDI Agent 12.9.2
Cisco Jabber.pkg
Install the JVDI package on ThinOS
About this task
You must install the Cisco Jabber package to use Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI. To install the Cisco Jabber package using
Wyse Management Suite, see
Upload and push ThinOS 9.1 application packages
.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 117
Setting up the Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI
About this task
This section describes how to install and use the Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI on a Citrix or VMware desktop.
Steps
1. Go to www.cisco.com
, and download the following software:
● Cisco JVDI Agent 12.9.2
● Cisco Jabber application 12.9.2
2. On the virtual desktop, install Cisco JVDI Agent. Double-click the file and follow the installation wizard steps.
3. On the virtual desktop, install Cisco Jabber.
For information about the installation procedure, see the installation guide at www.cisco.com
.
4. Update the ThinOS firmware, and install the JVDI package on the ThinOS client using Wyse Management Suite.
NOTE: If ThinOS running Cisco Jabber (JVDI) fails to register with Cisco Unified Communications Manager, add the
DNS servers and DNS domains that are used by the Citrix host and the Cisco Unified Communications Manager servers to ThinOS. You can either specify the domain name and server IP on the General tab in Network Setup , or add the
DNS server and domain value to the DHCP server by providing the IP address information to the ThinOS client. For issues related to Cisco Unified Communications, contact Cisco support.
5. Log in to the Citrix virtual desktop, and sign in to Cisco Jabber using your user credentials.
When you log in for the first time, do the following: a. On the Cisco Jabber interface, click Advanced Settings .
b. Select your account type as Cisco Communications Manager 9 or later .
c. Enter the login server address.
NOTE: If the Use my computer for calls option is selected, the Cisco Jabber is automatically registered with Cisco
Unified Communications Manager. This option enables Jabber to work as a Softphone, and use the microphone or speaker that is connected to the thin client for phone calls.
Using Cisco Jabber
Use the Cisco Jabber application to perform the following tasks:
● Start an audio call
● Answer the call
● Hold or resume the call
● Stop the video
● Mute or unmute the audio
● Turn on or turn off the self-view
● Enter or exit the full screen
● Merge the calls
● Audio conferencing
● Transfer the call
● Play voice mail
● Forward the call to voicemail
● Forward the call to another number
● Forward voice messages directly
● Use the Device Selector menu to switch between headsets
● Use the Device Selector menu to switch between cameras
● Set up secure phone capabilities
● Answer the call on multiple phone devices (Shared Line feature)
NOTE: It is recommended that you reduce the video resolution to 640 x 360p with 30fps on the Wyse 3040 Thin Client.
118 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
For information about troubleshooting your Cisco Jabber, see the Deployment and Installation Guide for Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI at www.cisco.com
.
For information about Cisco Jabber-related issues, see the Release notes for Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI document at www.cisco.com
.
For information about accessories for headsets and speakers, see the Unified Communications Endpoint and Client Accessories article at www.cisco.com
.
Using Device Selector
About this task
Cisco Jabber Softphone for VDI consists of a component called Device Selector . Use the Device Selector menu to manage your audio devices and cameras.
If you have multiple devices connected to the thin client, you can view your active device, or select a different device. To enable a device, do the following:
Steps
1. In the Windows notification area, click the Device Selector icon.
The available devices are listed.
2. Click a device to make it active.
Verify the Cisco Jabber connection status
About this task
This section describes how to verify the Cisco Jabber connection status on your thin client.
Steps
1. Install the correct connector on the remote desktop.
2. Install the correct package on the ThinOS device.
3. Connect any audio or video devices.
4. Connect to a VDI desktop, and start the Cisco Jabber application.
5. Open the Settings menu, and go to Help > Show connection status .
The Connection Status window is displayed.
6. Click JVDI Details , and confirm the following attributes:
● JVDI Client version
● JVDI Agent version
● Virtual Channel status
● SIP status
● Softphone CTI status
7. Establish a video or an audio call.
8. Answer the call by either clicking the mouse or using the headset button.
9. Verify the call statistics.
For more information about verifying your installation and collecting the troubleshooting information, see the Cisco documentation at www.cisco.com
.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 119
Cisco Webex Teams for VDI
Cisco Webex Teams Virtual desktop application is the Unified Communications product from Cisco for messaging and team collaboration in a VDI environment. It supports calling and messaging functionality on the hosted virtual desktops. Cisco Webex
Teams offloads media processing from the virtual desktop server to the thin client. All audio and video signals are routed directly between the endpoints without going through the hosted desktop.
Cisco Webex Teams for VDI consists of the following components:
● Cisco Webex Teams virtual desktop application
● Cisco Webex thin client plug-in
Cisco Webex Teams virtual desktop application runs on the VDI desktop or server. Cisco Webex Teams thin client plug-in is the thin client package that runs on the thin client.
Table 34. Supported environment
Component
Thin Client
Connection Broker agent for the hosted virtual desktops
Supported platforms/supported versions
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
● Citrix Virtual Desktops
● VMware Horizon published desktop
Refer the Release Notes for the supported version.
Cisco Webex Teams Virtual Desktop app on the hosted virtual desktop
Cisco Webex Teams Plugin on the thin client WebexTeams.pkg
Install the Cisco Webex Teams package on ThinOS
You must install the Webex Teams package on ThinOS to use Cisco Webex Teams for VDI. To install the Webex Teams package using Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool, see
Upload and push ThinOS 9.1 application packages
.
Setting up the Cisco Webex Teams for VDI
This section describes how to install and use the Cisco Webex Teams for VDI on a virtual desktop.
Steps
1. Go to www.webex.com/downloads/teams-vdi.html
and download the supported Webex Teams host installer—
Ver:41.1.0.17621.3, for Dell Wyse only .
2. On the virtual desktop, install the Cisco Webex Teams Virtual Desktop application.
a. Open Command Prompt with administrator privileges.
b. Run the following command: msiexec /i WebexTeams.msi ALLUSERS=1
AUTOUPGRADEENABLED=0 ENABLEVDI=1
3. Install the following ThinOS packages on the ThinOS client:
● Citrix Workspace app package —Install this package if you want to use the Cisco Webex Teams application with Citrix
Desktops.
● VMware Horizon package —Install this package if you want to use the Cisco Webex Teams application with VMware
Horizon server published desktops.
● Cisco Webex VDI package —Install this package to use Cisco Webex Teams for VDI.
4. Log in to the virtual desktop, and sign in to the Webex Teams application using your credentials.
120 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
Cisco Webex Teams optimization on Citrix Workspace app feature matrix
Table 35. Cisco Webex Teams optimization on Citrix Workspace app feature matrix
Scenarios
Call—Audio call
Call—Video call
ThinOS 9.1
Supported
Supported
Call—Long audio call
Call—Long video call
Chat
Call—Mute or unmute
Call—Turn on or turn off camera
Full screen
Share screen—screen 1
Call—Chat during video call
Call—Add guest
Call—New Whiteboard
Camera—Camera setting
Camera—Preview camera
Camera—Plugin or unplug the Camera
Camera—Switch camera during video call
Speaker and Microphone
Plug or remove the headset
Switch headset during audio call
End call
Group audio call
Group video call
Group chat
Meetings
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not tested
Not tested
Supported
Supported
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Cisco Webex Teams optimization on VMware feature matrix
Table 36. Cisco Webex Teams optimization on VMware feature matrix
Scenarios
Call—Audio call
ThinOS 9.1
Limited Support—Audio and video calls are supported only by
TCP connection.
Call—Video call Limited Support—Audio and video calls are supported only by
TCP connection. On Wyse 5070 Thin Client, the video screen stays on ThinOS desktop screen if you switch to desktop during a video call.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 121
Table 36. Cisco Webex Teams optimization on VMware feature matrix (continued)
Scenarios
Call—Long audio call
ThinOS 9.1
Supported—The device stops responding occasionally during audio and video calls. This is a known issue.
Call—Long video call
Chat
Call—Mute or Unmute
Call—Turn on or turn off camera
Full screen
Share screen—Screen 1
Share screen—Other applications
Share screen—Share system audio
Share screen—Optimize for video
Call—Chat during a video call
Call—Add guest
Call—New whiteboard
Camera—Camera setting
Camera—Preview camera
Camera—Plug or unplug the camera
Camera—Switch camera during a video call
Speaker and microphone
Plug or unplug headset
Switch headset during audio call
End call
Group audio call
Group video call
Group chat
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported—Synchronous with Ubuntu
Not supported—Synchronous with Ubuntu
Not supported—Synchronous with Ubuntu
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported—The camera does not display any image during a video call. This is a known issue.
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Verify the Cisco Webex Teams connection status
This section describes how to verify if Cisco Webex Teams runs in Optimized mode status on your thin client. In Optimized mode, the Webex Teams application delivers an optimal performance.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have installed the supported version of the Cisco Webex Teams application on the remote desktop.
● Ensure that you have installed the correct Cisco Webex Teams package on the ThinOS device.
Steps
1. Connect to a virtual desktop session on ThinOS.
2. Start the Cisco Webex Teams virtual desktop application.
122 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
3. From the current user menu, click Help > Health Checker .
4. In the Health Checker window, check if VDI is connected and all services are accessible. Also, verify if the VDI version compatibility and the virtual channel are connected.
Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI
Cisco Webex Meetings Virtual desktop software is the Unified Communications product from Cisco for real-time video conferencing in a VDI environment. It supports audio-video conferencing on the hosted virtual desktops. Cisco Webex Meetings offloads media processing from the virtual desktop server to the thin client. All audio and video signals are routed directly between the endpoints without going through the hosted desktop.
Cisco Webex Meetings Virtual Desktop software enables you to attend meetings in a VDI environment. Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI consists of the following components:
● Cisco Webex Meetings virtual desktop application
● Cisco Webex Meetings thin client plug-in
Cisco Webex Meetings Virtual Desktop app runs on the VDI desktop or server. Cisco Webex Meeting thin client plug-in is the thin client package that runs on the thin client.
Table 37. Supported environment
Component
Thin Client
Connection Broker agent for the hosted virtual desktops
Cisco Webex Meetings Virtual Desktop app on the hosted virtual desktop
Cisco Webex Meeting Plugin on the thin client
Supported environment
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
Citrix Virtual Desktops
41.3 (Maximum supported version)
Cisco WebEx Meetings package
Limitation —On a ThinOS-based device with NVIDIA vGPU, you cannot launch WebEx Meetings in a VDI optimized mode. This is a Cisco limitation.
Workaround—Use a combination of GPU pass-through and a Windows registry setting as follows:
● If you are a current user and using Webex Meeting Suite v40.6.7,v40.7.4, v40.8.2, or v40.9.0, add the following to the
Windows Registry key on the hosted virtual desktop:
○ Key— Computer\HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\\Cisco Systems, Inc.\CiscoVDI
○ Values:
￭ Name— isVDIEnv
￭ Type— REG_EXPAND_SZ
￭ Data— true
NOTE: Restart Webex Meetings after you edit the registry.
● If you are an administrator of the local machine and using Webex Meeting Suite 40.10.5 or 40.11.0, add the following to the
Windows Registry key on the hosted virtual desktop:
○ Key:
￭ For a 32-bit operating system— Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Cisco Spark Native
￭ For a 64-bit operating system— Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\WOW6432Node\Cisco Spark
Native
○ Values:
￭ Name— isVDIEnv
￭ Type— REG_EXPAND_SZ
￭ Data— true
NOTE: Restart Webex Meetings after you edit the registry.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 123
Install the Cisco Webex Meetings package on ThinOS
You must install the Cisco WebEx Meetings package on ThinOS to use Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI. To install the Webex
Setting up the Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI
This section describes how to install and use the Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI on a virtual desktop.
Steps
1. Install the Cisco Webex Meetings desktop application when you first join the meeting from URL.
2. Install the following ThinOS packages on the ThinOS client:
● Citrix Workspace app package —Install this package if you want to use the Cisco Webex Meetings application with
Citrix Virtual Desktops.
● Cisco WebEx Meetings package —Install this package to use Cisco Webex Meetings for VDI.
3. Log in to the virtual desktop, and join the Cisco Webex Meeting.
Cisco Webex Meetings optimization feature matrix
Table 38. Cisco Webex Meetings optimization feature matrix
Scenarios ThinOS 9.1
Join meeting Supported
Audio call
Video call
Start video
Stop video
Switch camera during meetings
Adjust volume
Testing microphone
Testing speaker
End meeting
Leave meeting
Change microphone device
Change speaker device
Mute by self
Unmute
Lock meeting
Return meeting
Hotplug headset
Plug out headset
Plug out headset and plug in a new headset device
Disconnect network
Disconnect desktop
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
124 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
Table 38. Cisco Webex Meetings optimization feature matrix (continued)
Scenarios
Music mode
ThinOS 9.1
Supported
Polls
Chat—To everyone
Chat—To specified participants
Share screen—If 1 monitor is connected
Share screen—If multiple monitors are connected
Share screen—Whiteboard
Share screen—Share one of the applications
Share screen—Switch share content
Share screen—Annotates
Share screen—Pause or Resume
Share screen—View—full screen
Share screen—View—Zoom in/out/to
Share screen—Start or Stop video during share screen
Record meeting—Start, Pause, or Stop recording
Support—Request Desktop Control
Support—Request Application Control
Stop share screen
Participant
Close Participant
Not tested
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not tested
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Verify the Cisco Webex Meetings connection status
This section describes how to verify if Cisco Webex Meeting runs in optimized mode status on your thin client. In Optimized mode, the Webex Meetings application delivers an optimal performance.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have installed the supported version of the Cisco Webex Meetings virtual desktop application on the remote desktop.
● Ensure that you have installed the correct Cisco WebEx Meetings package on the ThinOS device.
● Ensure that you have referred the Compatibility between the Webex Meetings Desktop App and the Thin Client
Plugin table to configure Webex Meetings optimization mode environment. To access the compatibility table, do the following:
1. Go to help.webex.com
.
2. In the search bar, enter Cisco Webex Meetings Virtual Desktop Software , and press Enter.
3. Click Cisco WebEx Meetings Virtual Desktop Software from the results.
4. Scroll down the page to view the Compatibility between the Webex Meetings Desktop App and the Thin Client
Plugin table.
Steps
1. Connect to a virtual desktop session on ThinOS.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 125
2. Start the Cisco Webex Meetings virtual desktop application.
3. In the Cisco Webex Meetings window, check if Cisco Webex Meetings - VDI is displayed on the upper-left corner of the screen.
If the Webex Meeting does not run in optimized mode, do either of the following:
● If you are having administrator privileges, go to the Webex Meetings Administration site and ensure that the Enable meeting client for VDI check box is selected in the Common Site Settings tab.
● If you do not have administrator privileges, edit the registry in VDI as follows: a. In the system registry of VDI, go to HKEY_CURRENT_USER > SOFTWARE > WebEx > NativeVDI .
b. Create a DWORD entry VDIFeatureEnabled with value 1 .
Zoom Meetings for VDI
Zoom Meetings for VDI is the Unified Communications solution offered by Zoom for virtual deployments. It supports enterprise video conferencing and screen sharing on the virtual desktops. Zoom offloads media processing from the virtual desktop server to the thin client. All audio and video signals are routed directly between the endpoints. You can use the Zoom application to make and receive calls in the VDI session.
Zoom Meetings for VDI consists of the following components:
● Zoom VDI Client
● Zoom Media Plug-in
Zoom VDI Client is the host installer that runs on the VDI desktop or server. Zoom Media Plugin is the thin client package that runs on the thin client.
NOTE: The VDI Client version must not be older than the plug-in version for Zoom optimization to work on ThinOS.
Table 39. Supported environment
Component Supported platforms/supported versions
Thin Client ● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
Connection Broker agent for the hosted virtual desktops
● Citrix Virtual Desktops
● VMware Horizon published desktop
5.4.59458.0109.3
Zoom VDI Client on the hosted virtual desktop
Zoom Media Plugin on the thin client ● Zoom_Citrix.pkg for Citrix VDI
● Zoom_Horizon.pkg for VMware VDI
Install the Zoom package on ThinOS
You must install the Zoom package to use Zoom Meetings for VDI. To install the Zoom package using Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool, see
Upload and push ThinOS 9.1 application packages
.
Setting up the Zoom Meetings for VDI
This section describes how to install and use the Zoom Meetings for VDI on a virtual desktop.
Steps
1. Go to support.zoom.us/hc/en-us/articles/360057674971 and click the Download VDI Client 3.3.3
link.
The ZoomInstallerVDI.msi
is downloaded to your system.
2. On the virtual desktop, install the Zoom VDI Client. Double-click the file and follow the installation wizard steps.
3. Install the following ThinOS packages on the ThinOS client:
126 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
● If you want to use Zoom with Citrix virtual desktops, install the following packages:
○ Citrix Workspace app package
○ Zoom_Citrix package
● If you want to use Zoom with VMware Horizon published desktops, install the following packages:
○ VMware Horizon package
○ Zoom_VMware package
4. Log in to the virtual desktop, and sign in to the Zoom application using your credentials.
Zoom optimization feature matrix
Table 40. Zoom optimization feature matrix
Scenario
Long audio or video meetings
New meeting with audio only
New meeting with audio and video
Join a meeting
Schedule a meeting
Meeting with multiple participants
End meeting for all
Leave meeting
Share screen directly with meeting ID
Gallery View or Speaker View
Enter or exit Full screen
Mute or unmute audio
Start or stop video
Security—Lock meeting
Security—Enable waiting meeting
Security—Allow participants to share screen
Security—Allow participants to chat
Security—Allow participants to rename themselves
Participants—Invite people to join in meeting
Polls
Chat
Share screen—If 1 monitor is connected
Share screen—If multiple monitors are connected
Share screen—Whiteboard
Share screen—Share one of the applications
Record meeting—Start, Pause, or Stop recording
Live Transcript—Show subtitles
Live Transcript—View full transcript
Live Transcript—Subtitle settings
Support—Request Desktop Control
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
ThinOS 9.1
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 127
Table 40. Zoom optimization feature matrix (continued)
Scenario
Support—Request Application Control
ThinOS 9.1
Supported
Support—Request computer restart
Live on custom live streaming service
Audio Devices—Plug or unplug headset
Audio Devices—Switch headset
Video Devices—Plug or unplug camera
Video Devices—Switch camera
Video Devices—Choose virtual background
Headset buttons—Answer/Mute/End Call
Supported
Not tested
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Limited support—Only Mute button is supported
NOTE: Video call/meeting and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Verify the Zoom connection status
This section describes how to verify if Zoom runs in Optimized mode status on your thin client. In Optimized mode, the Zoom application delivers an optimal performance.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have installed the correct Zoom VDI client on the remote desktop.
● Ensure that you have installed the correct Zoom package on the ThinOS device.
Steps
1. Connect to a virtual desktop session on ThinOS.
2. Start the Zoom application.
3. Click the Settings icon and then click Statistics .
4. In the Overall tab, check if the VDI Connect Status is displayed as Connected, Direct .
Microsoft Teams Optimization
ThinOS supports audio optimization for Microsoft Teams using Citrix Workspace app 2101. VMware Real-Time Audio Video
(RTAV) supports Microsoft Teams, however, optimization is not supported.
To enable the Teams optimization feature for Citrix, you must meet the following requirements:
● Install the Microsoft Teams on your VDI desktop. For more information about the Microsoft Teams installation, see the
Optimization for Microsoft Teams article at docs.citrix.com
.
● Review the system requirements of Citrix Virtual Desktops and VDA. For more information about the system requirements, see the Optimization for Microsoft Teams article at docs.citrix.com
.
● Enable the Microsoft Teams redirection policy is enabled in Citrix Studio. For more information about how to enable the
Microsoft Teams redirection, see the Multimedia policy settings article at docs.citrix.com
.
On the ThinOS client side, you must download the Citrix package 2101 from Dell.com/support and install the package using
Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite. For information about how to install the ThinOS application packages, see the
Upload and install ThinOS 9.x application packages using Admin Policy Tool
or
Upload and install ThinOS 9.x application packages using Wyse Management Suite
.
To verify if the Microsoft Teams application works in the optimized mode, click About > Version to view the Citrix HDX
Optimized legend. For more information about how to verify the Microsoft Teams audio optimization, see the Optimization for
Microsoft Teams article at docs.citrix.com
.
128 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
Table 41. Microsoft Teams optimization feature matrix
Scenario
Long meetings
ThinOS
Supported
Call—Make an audio call
Call—Answer an audio call
Call—Make a video call
Call—Answer a video call
Call—Turn the camera on or off
Call—Enter or exit full screen
Call—Hold or resume a call
Call—End call
Call—Mute or unmute audio
Call—Transfer
Call—Consult then transfer
Call—Keypad
Call—Start or stop recording
Call—Turn off or turn on incoming video
Call—Group video call
Call—Group audio call
Call—Invite someone during a call
Meeting
Share screen—Desktop
Share screen—PowerPoint
Chat
Audio or video call in VDI server desktop
Audio or video call in published Microsoft Teams application
Devices—Plug in or disconnect the headset
Devices—Switch headset
Devices—Plug in or disconnect the camera
Devices—Switch camera
Headset buttons—Answer/Mute/End Call
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not tested
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported—Headsets can be automatically selected when you connect a new headset during the call or meeting.
Teams use the default audio device that is configured by
ThinOS client. If the headset is selected as default, it shows a default: label in Teams device settings. If you plug in a webcam with mic, the mic on the webcam gets selected. You can manually select the audio device in Teams device settings.
Limited support—If you install JVDI package in ThinOS, the switched headset does not work. Dell Technologies recommends to not install JVDI package if you are using
Microsoft Teams.
Supported
Not supported—This is a known Citrix issue.
Limited support—The Answer/End call button is not supported. This is a Citrix Workspace app limitation.
Limitations
● Video call and share screen features are not supported on Wyse 3040 Thin Clients due to client resource limitations.
Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS 129
● Video call and share screen features are recommended on Wyse 5070 Thin Clients, 5470 Thin Clients, and Wyse 5470
All-in-One Thin Clients with known issues.
○ The audio gets distorted during a meeting when you share screen from thin client to a laptop or desktop that uses native
Microsoft Teams. There is no workaround right now and the issue is being worked on.
○ The audio gets distorted during a meeting when all the participants mute while the screen presenter is sharing the screen or the camera, with audio. Workaround is to ensure that at least one participant has not muted while the screen presenter is sharing screen or has the camera enabled.
○ When users share screen in a Teams meeting between Wyse 5070 thin clients or Wyse 5470 thin clients, the audio gets distorted while talking.
○ The audio gets distorted when you play HTML5 videos using Browser Content Redirection in the shared screen when in a meeting.
○ The audio gets distorted when you browse a website with multiple pictures in the browser while sharing screen.
○ The audio gets distorted occasionally on a thin client with dual core CPU.
● Other known issues for CWA Teams Optimization
○ Depending on your network bandwidth latency, the audio quality may fluctuate. To avoid this issue, ensure that your network bandwidth is adequate for audio or video call. Citrix recommends 200 kbps or higher network speed for a single client.
○ Switching cameras during a Microsoft Teams call in not recommended. This issue is a known Citrix Workspace App limitation [Case #80109986].
○ Session termination or abrupt disconnect may result in unexpected HdxRtcEngine.exe processing exits. This issue is a known Citrix Workspace App limitation [RFLNX-5885].
○ Audio is still played through the first headset when you switch to the second headset during the call. This issue is observed when you have installed the JVDI package on the thin client. Workaround is that if you are using Microsoft
Teams (or Zoom), do not install the Cisco JVDI package. This issue is due to Cisco limitation.
○ When using a headset, you cannot answer or end the call through headset buttons. This issue is due to a limitation of
Microsoft Teams.
○ Microsoft Teams optimization using the proxy server is not supported.
130 Unified Communications optimization with ThinOS
8
Configuring third-party authentication settings
ThinOS supports the following third-party authentication types:
● Imprivata —ThinOS supports Imprivata on Citrix, VMware, and Microsoft VDI solutions in both Imprivata ProveID Embedded and ProveID Webapi modes. The following are supported VDI solutions:
○ Citrix Desktop
○ Citrix XenApp
○ Microsoft Remote Desktop Services session based and virtual desktop
○ Microsoft Remote Desktop Services Remote PC
○ Microsoft Remote Desktop Services RemoteApp
○ VMware Horizon - Desktops
○ VMware Horizon - Application
● Identity Automation —ThinOS supports RapidIdentity for Healthcare (formerly HealthCast) SSO solution.
Configure the Imprivata OneSign server
OneSign Virtual Desktop Access provides a seamless authentication experience and can be combined with single sign-on for No
Click Access to desktops and applications in a virtual desktop environment.
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Imprivata OneSign server on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Authentication tab, and select the authentication as Imprivata .
3. In the OneSign Server field, enter either https://ip or https://FQDN values of the OneSign server.
The security setting for OneSign server in the Admin Policy Tool controls the security level of OneSign. The security level is set as high by default and you must import the certificate of the OneSign server before using the OneSign feature. The certificate is not required if the security level is set as low.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
5. Restart the thin client.
The Imprivata login dialog box is displayed.
The following OneSign features or actions are supported:
● Client and Broker authentication
○ Citrix Virtual Apps (formerly Citrix XenApp)
○ Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops (formerly Citrix XenDesktop)
○ VMware Horizon Desktops
○ VMware Published Application
○ Microsoft RDS/Remote PC Desktops
○ Microsoft RDS Applications
● Kiosk Mode
● Fast User Switching
● Non-OneSign user VDI access
● Hotkey Disconnect
Configuring third-party authentication settings 131
● Proximity card reader redirection
● Guided Question and Answer login
● Authenticate w/Password
● Authenticate w/Password + Password Change
● Authenticate w/Password + Password Change | New Password is Invalid
● Authenticate w/Proximity Card + Password
● Authenticate w/Proximity Card + Pin
● Authenticate w/Proximity Card + Pin | Pin not enrolled
● Authenticate w/Proximity Card Alone | Retrieve Password
● Retrieve User Identity Password
● Reset User Identity Password
● Update User Identity Password
● Enroll Proximity Card
● Lock/Unlock Terminal with Proximity CardLock/Unlock Terminal with Proximity Card
● Treat Smart card as proximity card
VDI selection on ThinOS
ThinOS supports Imprivata on Citrix, VMware, and Microsoft VDI solutions in both Imprivata ProveID Embedded and ProveID
Webapi modes.
● For ProveID Webapi mode, select VDI type from Automate access to setting in Admin Policy Tool.
● For ProveID Embedded mode, the VDI selection is controlled by Imprivata OneSign policy.
NOTE: The VMware Horizon Client Native PCoIP is used instead of Teradici PCoIP when you log in to the VMware Horizon
View broker using the Imprivata PIE mode.
OMNIKEY readers
The OMNIKEY readers are presented and recognized as smart cards in the PIE mode when the Treat smart card authentications as proximity card authentications option is enabled in Computer Policy. If you want to use OMNIKEY readers as proximity card readers, disable the Treat smart card authentications as proximity card authentications option in Computer Policy.
For PIW mode, the OMNIKEY readers are always presented and recognized as proximity card readers.
Configure the VDI settings on OneSign server
To use Citrix, VMware, and Microsoft VDI with OneSign, you must specify the broker server details in the OneSign Server Web
Console.
Steps
1. Open the Imprivata OneSign Server Web Console.
2. On the Computers page, click the Virtual Desktops tab.
3. Add the VDI broker URL in the respective VDI sections.
4. Select the Allow authentication from devices check box for the respective VDI brokers.
5. Save your settings.
Configure objects on Imprivata Server
About this task
This section describes how to configure different objects on the Imprivata server.
132 Configuring third-party authentication settings
Steps
1. To configure the general configuration object, do the following: a. On the Imprivata server, click Computer policy , and then click General tab.
b. Select the check box to enable users to shut down and restart the device from the lock screen.
● Shutdown Allow
○ Select the check box to enable the feature. If enabled, the shutdown and restart icons are displayed in the
ThinOS login and locked windows.
○ Clear the check box to disable the feature. If disabled, the shutdown and restart icons are not available.
● FailedOneSignAuth Allow —Click either Yes or No . If you are a non-OneSign user, click No to log in to the broker.
● Display name format — Use this option to set different formats for the account name that is displayed in pop-up notifications.
2. To configure the walkway configuration object, do the following: a. On the Imprivata server, click Computer policy , and then click the Walk Away tab.
● Key mouse inactivity enabled and behavior —Use this option to set the action when the keyboard and mouse are left idle or inactive. The In addition to keyboard and mouse inactivity check box is not supported.
● Passive proximity cards —Use this option to enable the proximity card usage.
○ If you want to use a proximity card to lock the thin client, select the Tap to lock check box.
○ If you want to lock the thin client and log in as a different user. Select the Switch users check box.
● Lock warning enabled and type —Use this option to enable or disable warning messages. The following three types are supported:
○ None —No warning messages are displayed.
○ Notification balloon —ThinOS displays a notification window.
○ Screensaver —Hide the display contents before the thin client locks.
● Warning message —Use this option to customize your warning messages
● Lock Screen type —Use this option to set the lock screen type. Only obscure type is supported.
● Hot key to lock workstation or log off user —Use this option to set Hot keys for ThinOS. The following keys are supported:
○ F1
○ F12
○ Backspace
○ Del
○ Down
○ End
○ Enter
○ Esc
○ Home
○ Insert
○ Left Alt
○ Left
○ Left Ctrl
○ NumLock
○ Page Down
○ Page Up
○ Right Ctrl
○ Right
○ Right Alt
○ Space
○ Tab
○ Up
○ a~z
○ A~Z
○ 0~9
○ Modifier +, %, ^ (Shift, Alt, and Control)
● Suspend action —The server configuration controls this feature on ThinOS.
3. To configure the Self-Service Password Reset (SSPR) configuration object, select the appropriate options on the screen.
Configuring third-party authentication settings 133
The SSPR configuration object controls the Self-Service Password Reset behavior for a user. The enabled attribute specifies whether the user is allowed to reset their password as part of emergency access. The mandatory attribute specifies whether the user must reset their password as part of emergency access.
4. To configure the RFIDeas configuration object, select the appropriate options on the screen.
The RFIDeas configuration object controls the behavior of the RFIDeas readers.
5. To configure the custom background configuration object, do the following: a. On the Imprivata server, click Computer policy .
b. Click the Customization tab and upload a custom background file.
6. To configure the cobranding configuration object, do the following: a. On the Imprivata server, click Computer policy .
b. Click the Customization tab and upload a logo image file.
The logo image impacts all the dialog boxes in ThinOS with raw logo.
7. To modify the text that is displayed in the sign-on UI and lock window, configure the SSPR customization configuration object.
8. To configure the password self-services force enrollment feature, select the check box. This enables you to reset the primary authentication password.
Use smart card as proximity card
You can use a smart card as a proximity card to authenticate the user. When you tap the smart card on the smart card reader, the Imprivata agent uses the smart card's unique serial number as the Unique ID (UID) of the proximity card.
About this task
This section describes how to use a smart card as a proximity card.
Steps
1. Log in to the OneSign Administrator console.
2. Go to the Computers page and click Computer Policy .
3. In the Smart card readers section, select the Treat smart card authentications as proximity card authentications check box.
Next steps
To authenticate the user using a proximity card, connect a supported reader to the thin client. Before you tap the card, ensure that your card is already enrolled to the user. When you tap your card on the reader, the thin client authenticates the user and starts the VDI connection.
Enroll a proximity card with Imprivata OneSign
About this task
This section describes how to enroll a proximity card with Imprivata OneSign.
Steps
1. Tap the proximity card. The card enrollment page is displayed.
2. Enter the credentials and click OK .
Proximity card is enrolled successfully.
Imprivata Bio-metric Single Sign-On
Fingerprint identification feature is highly reliable, and cannot be replicated, altered, or misappropriated.
The prerequisites of OneSign server are:
134 Configuring third-party authentication settings
● Imprivata v4.9 or later appliance version is needed that supports the WebAPI v5 and later versions.
● Fingerprint identification license is required.
● Fingerprint reader device is required. ET710 (PID 147e VID 2016) and ET700 (PID 147e VID 3001) are the supported devices.
Supported user scenarios
● Signing in or unlocking the ThinOS devices using the Fingerprint authentication.
○ Configure the OneSign server on ThinOS, and then connect the Fingerprint reader device.
○ The ThinOS Fingerprint window is displayed automatically after the OneSign server is initialized.
○ Fingerprint authentication works on the ThinOS unlock window.
● Unlocking the Virtual Desktop using the Fingerprint authentication.
○ Enable the Imprivata Virtual Channel option from the ThinOS Global Connection settings.
○ When you lock the virtual desktop in the session, the Fingerprint window is displayed automatically.
● Managing Fingerprints on a virtual desktop.
○ Legend Fingerprint Management is supported.
○ Fingerprint management with Imprivata Confirm ID enabled is not supported.
Grace period to skip second authentication factor
Grace period enables you to specify a time limit on OneSign server for logging in without the second authentication factor after the first login session.
NOTE: After you specify the grace period, you must first use the proximity badge, and then enter password or OneSign PIN for the initial login.
If you use the proximity card after the time limit that you specified for grace period, the second authentication factor window is displayed with the message Grace period expired .
If you enter a wrong password or PIN, the second authentication factor window is displayed with the warning message OneSign could not authenticate you. Try again.
Imprivata OneSign ProveID Embedded
ThinOS supports the Imprivata OneSign ProveID Embedded (PIE) feature that enables secure authentication to virtual desktops and applications. Using this feature, you can seamlessly access the clinical applications. The PIE solution simplifies access to roaming desktops with Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops, VMware Horizon Desktops and Applications, and Remote Desktop
Services. You can also deploy a Citrix Virtual App hosted desktop with Fast User Switching (FUS) to eliminate the need for generic user log-ins. For more information about the Imprivata OneSign ProveID Embedded, see the documentation available at www.imprivata.com
.
Table 42. Supported environment
Component Supported environment
Endpoints (Thin Clients) ● Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client
● Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● Wyse 5070 Thin Client
● Wyse 3040 Thin Client
VDI environment
OneSign server (tested)
PIE Agent on the thin client
Authentication methods
● Citrix Desktop
● Citrix XenApp
● Microsoft Remote Desktop Services session based and virtual desktop
● Microsoft Remote Desktop Services Remote PC
● VMware Horizon - Desktops
7.1.005.42
7.1.005.0039
● Network password
● Proximity card
● Security questions
Configuring third-party authentication settings 135
Table 42. Supported environment (continued)
Component Supported environment
● PIN (as a secondary factor)
● Fingerprint biometrics
Table 43. Imprivata ProveID Embedded feature matrix
Feature
General Features and Workflows
Imprivata Walk Away Security
Description
Imprivata Appliance failover
ThinOS PIE
Supported
Imprivata offline mode
Imprivata self- service password reset
Not applicable
Supported
Third-party self- service password reset
Not applicable
Non- OneSign user workflow Supported
Spine Combined workflow Not applicable
Supported Smartcard as proximity card workflow
Honors lock command Not applicable
Citrix Workflows
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Supported
VMware Workflows
Microsoft Workflows
Primary Authentication Modalities using Endpoint Operating System
Fade to Lock screensaver
Notification balloon
Citrix Virtual Desktops
Citrix Virtual Applications
Virtual Kiosk Citrix for Virtual
Desktops for Desktops
Virtual Kiosk for Citrix
Published Applications
VMware Horizon Desktops
VMware Published
Application Support
Virtual Kiosk for VMware
Desktops
Virtual Kiosk for VMware
Published Applications
Microsoft RDS/Remote PC
Desktops
Microsoft RDS Applications
Virtual Kiosk for RDS/
Remote PC Desktops
Virtual Kiosk for RDS
Published Applications
Password
Proximity card
Smart card
Fingerprint biometrics
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
136 Configuring third-party authentication settings
ThinOS PIW
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Table 43. Imprivata ProveID Embedded feature matrix (continued)
Feature Description
Question and Answer
ThinOS PIE
Supported
Authentication/ Re-Authentication
Modalities using Virtual Channel
Proximity card
Smart card
Fingerprint biometrics
Imprivata Hands Free
Authentication
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
ThinOS PIW
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Supported
Not applicable
The overall PIE configuration on ThinOS includes the following tasks:
1. Configure the OneSign Admin Console. See, Configure the OneSign Admin Console
.
2. Install the Imprivata PIE agent package on ThinOS. See,
Install the Imprivata PIE package on ThinOS
.
3. Enable the PIE mode on ThinOS using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite. See,
4. If the Security Mode for Imprivata settings is set to High , upload the appliance SSL certificate using any of the following methods:
●
Import the SSL certificate manually
.
●
Import the SSL certificate automatically
.
5. Configure the FUS on ThinOS (optional step). See,
Configure the Fast User Switching on ThinOS .
Configure the OneSign Admin Console
Steps
1. Open the OneSign Admin Console.
2. Log in as an administrator.
3. On the upper-right corner of the page, click the gear icon, and then click ProveID .
4. In the ProveID - API Access section, select the Allow access via ProveID Web API and ProveID Embedded check box.
5. Select the Dell Wyse Cloud Client check box.
6. Save the configuration.
Install the Imprivata PIE package on ThinOS
Steps
1. Go to www.dell.com/support and download the Imprivata package that contains the PIE agent. For more information, see
Download ThinOS 9.x firmware and packages .
2. Install the Imprivata package using any of the following methods:
●
.
● Using Admin Policy Tool. For more information, see
Upload and install ThinOS application packages using Admin Policy
Enable PIE mode on ThinOS
You can either use the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite or the local Admin Policy Tool to enable the
Imprivata ProveID Embedded (PIE) mode.
Steps
1. Open the Admin Policy Tool on your thin client or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. In the Configuration Control | ThinOS window, click the Advanced tab.
3. Expand Login Experience and click the 3rd Party Authentication option.
The Imprivata Settings window is displayed.
Configuring third-party authentication settings 137
4. From the Select Authentication Type drop-down list, select Imprivata .
5. In the OneSign Server field, enter the list of host names or IP addresses with optional TCP port number, or URLs of
Imprivata OneSign servers.
6. Click the Enable ProveID Embedded Mode slider switch to enable the ProveID Embedded mode on ThinOS.
NOTE: VDI silent mode is added from ThinOS 9.1.2101 onwards. You can click the VDI silent mode switch to enable or disable the option. Enabling the option allows ThinOS to load the VDI configurations from the Remote Connections window in ThinOS. By default, Imprivata OneSign policy controls the VDI selection. RDP is not supported in VDI silent mode .
7. Configure the Imprivata ProveID Embedded options as per your requirement.
8. Click Save & Publish .
Uploading OneSign appliance SSL certificate
If the Disable agent certificate checking option is enabled, you must upload the OneSign appliance SSL certificate using one of the following methods:
●
Import the SSL certificate manually
.
●
Import the SSL certificate automatically
.
Import the OneSign appliance SSL certificate automatically
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have created a group in Wyse Management Suite with a valid group token.
● Ensure that you have registered the ThinOS devices to Wyse Management Suite.
● Ensure that you have uploaded the SSL certificate to Apps & Data > File Repository > Inventory .
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite.
2. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select your preferred group.
3. Click Edit Policies > ThinOS 9.x
.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Expand Privacy & Security , and click Certificates .
6. Click the Auto Install Certificates slider switch to enable autoinstall of certificates on ThinOS.
7. From the Select Certificates to Upload drop-down list, select the SSL certificate.
8. Click Save & Publish .
The certificate is installed on your thin client.
Import OneSign appliance SSL certificate manually
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have acquired the OneSign appliance SSL certificate and stored the certificate on your USB drive.
Steps
1. Connect the USB drive to the thin client.
2. On the ThinOS client, go to System Tools > Certificates .
3. From the Import From drop-down list, select USB Storage .
4. Click Import .
5. Browse and select the SSL certificate that is stored in the USB drive.
6. Click OK .
The certificate is imported to your thin client.
138 Configuring third-party authentication settings
Configure Fast User Switching on ThinOS
Fast User Switching (FUS) is a feature of the Imprivata ProveID Embedded (PIE) agent that enables multiple users to securely access the shared environment. You can deploy a virtual desktop with FUS to eliminate the need for generic user log-ins.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have configured your virtual desktop.
● Ensure that you have configured the policies on the OneSign server.
● Ensure that you have enabled the PIE mode and configured the OneSign server on Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management
Suite. For more information, see
For more information about how to configure the virtual desktop and OneSign server policies, see the documentation at www.imprivata.com
.
Steps
1. On ThinOS, go to System Setup > Remote Connection > Broker Setup .
2. In the Broker Server field, specify the Citrix Broker agent server details. The format of the Broker agent server must be https://FQDN/citrix/storeweb .
3. In the Auto Connect List, enter the desktop name to automatically log in to the Citrix session.
4. Click OK .
5. Go to System Setup > Remote Connection > General Options .
6. Enter the default sign-on username, password, and domain.
7. Click OK .
Configure Imprivata fingerprint reader for Citrix ICA and PCoIP sessions
About this task
Dell Technologies recommends the following fingerprint device settings to get the best experience during fingerprint authentication.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click USB Redirection .
3. Click Add Row in vUSB Force Local and enter the fingerprint device ID. For example, enter 0x147e2016 .
4. Click Save & Publish .
Configure Imprivata fingerprint reader for VMware
Blast session
About this task
Dell Technologies recommends the following fingerprint device settings to get the best experience during fingerprint authentication.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Standard or Advanced tab, expand Broker Settings , and click VMware Broker Settings .
3. Enter the fingerprint device ID in to the Exclude Vid/Pid USB Device Redirection field. For example, enter vid-147e_pid-2016 .
Configuring third-party authentication settings 139
4. Click Save & Publish .
Configure the Identity Automation
Identity Automation authentication is an enhanced sign-on solution which uses proximity card technology to quickly and securely access a remote session. You can tap the proximity card (the same card that is used for building access or identification purposes) to log in and log out of your session. Using Identity Automation authentication, you do not need to enter the username and password each time you want access the session.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Remote Connections .
The Remote Connections dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Authentication tab, and select the Authentication Type as Identity Automation .
3. In the Identity Automation Server field, enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for your Identity Automation Lynx server. By default, port 443 is used. However, you can specify a different port by adding a colon and the port number to the end of the FQDN. For example, server1.mycompany.com:5000 . In this example, the specified server FQDN and port 5000 on that server are used.
4. In the API Key field, enter the server API key.
To obtain the API key, do the following: a. Log in to the Lynx server web application.
b. Go to Settings > API .
c. Click Copy to copy the API key.
5. In the Configuration ID field, enter the configuration ID number that you want the thin client to use. The configuration ID number is associated with a group of settings that you can specify. Log in to your Lynx server as an administrator to specify a group of settings and obtain the configuration ID number.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
7. Connect a supported RFIDeas proximity card reader to the thin client.
8. Restart the thin client.
The Identity Automation Tap your badge screen is displayed.
Identity Automation support matrix
The following are the supported features:
● Authentication to Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops, VMware Horizon, and Microsoft Remote Desktop Services by tapping an enrolled proximity card.
● A user can enroll their own proximity card by tapping it on the connected proximity card reader. The user is prompted to provide their credentials, and after the credentials are validated, the proximity card is enrolled. This is a one-time event for the user.
● Authenticate with proximity card and password.
● Authenticate with proximity card and PIN.
● Authenticate with password (for users who do not have a proximity card, or who do not want to use their proximity card).
● Supports seamless change password.
● Supports self-service password reset.
● Supports self-service PIN reset.
● Lock or Unlock the terminal by tapping a proximity card.
● Supports convenient tap-over functionality.
140 Configuring third-party authentication settings
Enroll a proximity card with Identity Automation on ThinOS
You can enroll the proximity card with Identity Automation on ThinOS. This enrollment is a one-time event for the user. After the proximity card is enrolled on one ThinOS client, you do not need to enroll your proximity card on other ThinOS clients.
About this task
Configure the Identity Automation authentication on ThinOS.
Steps
1. Connect a proximity card reader to the ThinOS client.
2. Tap the proximity card on the reader.
The proximity card is automatically recognized as an unenrolled card and a dialog box appears prompting you to enroll the proximity card.
3. Click Yes .
4. When prompted, enter the Active Directory username and password.
After successful authentication, the username and password are saved. You are automatically connected to the remote session.
Use a proximity card for sign-on with Identity Automation on
ThinOS
After you have enrolled the proximity card, you can use it to securely access your remote session. As an administrator, you can determine how often the user is prompted for their password or PIN when using the proximity card.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have configured the Identity Automation authentication on ThinOS.
● Ensure that you have enrolled the proximity card with Identity Automation.
Steps
1. Connect a proximity card reader to the ThinOS client.
2. Tap the proximity card on the reader.
After successful authentication, you are automatically logged in to the remote session.
If you are away for sometime and attempt to tap in the proximity card again, you may be prompted for either the password or PIN.
Use a proximity card to secure the remote session with Identity
Automation on ThinOS
To secure your remote session, tap the proximity card and lock the thin client. When you return within the configurable timeout period, you only need to tap the card again to access the session.
Prerequisites
● Ensure that you have configured the Identity Automation authentication on ThinOS.
● Ensure that you have enrolled the proximity card with Identity Automation.
Steps
1. Tap the proximity card on the reader that is connected to the ThinOS client.
The thin client is locked, and the remote session is secured.
2. When you return within the configured timeout period, tap the proximity card again on the reader.
After successful authentication, you are automatically logged in to the remote session.
Configuring third-party authentication settings 141
If you do not return within the configurable timeout period, the remote session is disconnected from the thin client but left running on the server. You can access the session again on the same thin client or another thin client where Identity
Automation authentication is enabled by tapping the proximity card.
Use a proximity card to tap-over another user session with Identity
Automation on ThinOS
When a user has locked the thin client, or has walked away from the thin client without securing their work, a second user can access their own session by tapping their own proximity card. The session of the first user is disconnected from the thin client but is left running on the server. The second user is then logged in to their own session.
142 Configuring third-party authentication settings
9
Configuring the thin client local settings
You can configure the local settings on the device using the System Preferences , Display , Peripherals , and Printer Setup dialog boxes. Depending on user privilege level, some dialog boxes and options may not be available for use.
Configuring the system preferences
Use the System Preference dialog box to select the system preferences such as screen saver, time/date, and custom information settings.
Configure the general system preferences
About this task
This section describes how to configure the general system settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > System Preferences .
The System Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the General tab, and do the following:
Figure 36. General tab
Configuring the thin client local settings 143
a. From the Screen Saver drop-down list, select a screensaver for your device. The default value is set to Turn Off
Screen .
b. In the Timer box, select the idle time after which you want the screensaver to be activated on the thin client. When the thin client is left idle for the specified idle time, the screensaver is initiated. The default value is set to 10 minutes.
c. From the Locale drop-down list, select a language to be activated for the user login-experience. The default language is set to English .
d. In the Terminal Name box, view the default name fo the terminal. You cannot change the terminal name on ThinOS GUI.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Set the time and date
About this task
This section describes how to configure the time and date settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > System Preferences .
The System Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Time/Date tab, and do the following:
Figure 37. Time and date a. From the Time Zone drop-down list, select a time zone where the thin client operates.
b. From the Time Format drop-down list, select either 12-hour time format or 24-hour time format .
c. From the Date Format drop-down list, select a date format to be used for date and time representation.
d. In the Time Servers field, enter the IP addresses or host names of the time server with optional TCP port number.
Each entry with an optional port number is specified as Name-or-IP: port . If not specified, port 80 is used. When you are using user profiles, locations can be supplied through user profiles. The time servers provide the thin client time based on the settings of the time zone and daylight saving information. If DHCP is used, locations can be supplied through DHCP.
e. Click the Change Date and Time button to change date and time for secure environments.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
144 Configuring the thin client local settings
Set the custom information
About this task
This section describes how to set the custom information on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > System Preferences .
The System Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Figure 38. Custom information
2. Click the Custom Info tab to enter configuration strings used by the Wyse Management Suite software. The configuration strings can contain information about the location, user, administrator, and so on.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
The custom field information is transferred to the Windows registry. The information is then available to Wyse Management
Suite.
Configuring power and sleep mode
About this task
NOTE: Power And Sleep tab is not available on Wyse 3040 Thin Client.
This section describes how to configure the power and sleep mode.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > System Preferences .
The System Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Power And Sleep tab.
Configuring the thin client local settings 145
Figure 39. Power And Sleep
3. To set the power and sleep options when the thin client is on battery, change the following options in When on battery : a. From the Power And Sleep drop-down list, select Power off or Sleep .
b. From the Timer drop-down list, select the duration for the thin client to be idle to enter sleep mode or power off.
c. From the When I close the lid drop-down list, select any of the following options to set the behavior of the thin client when the lid is closed:
● Turn off the built-in display —Turns off only the built-in display.
● Turn off the built-in and external displays —Turns off all the displays that are connected to the thin client.
● Shut down device —shuts down the thin client
NOTE: Power And Sleep > When on battery options are only available in Wyse 5470 Thin Client.
146 Configuring the thin client local settings
4. To set the power and sleep options when the thin client is plugged in, change the following options in Power And Sleep >
When plugged in : a. From the Power And Sleep drop-down list, select Power off or Sleep .
b. From the Timer drop-down list, select the duration for the thin client to be idle to enter sleep mode or power off.
c. From the When I close the lid drop-down list, select any of the following options to set the behavior of the thin client when the lid is closed:
● Turn off the built-in display —Turns off only the built-in display.
● Turn off the built-in and external displays —Turns off all the displays that are connected to the thin client.
● Shut down device —shuts down the thin client
NOTE: Power And Sleep > When plugged in > When I close the lid drop-down list is only available in Wyse 5470
Thin Client.
5. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the display settings
About this task
This section provides information about how to configure the display settings for the connected displays.
NOTE: On Wyse 5470 Thin Client, the built-in display stays on by default.
By default, the device uses the span mode if a new display is connected. When you change the display settings for the current display setup, the settings are preserved. If you connect the same display again, the device sets the monitor layout (including the disable monitor setting) according to the saved layout.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Display .
The Display Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Display Setup dialog box, configure any of following options:
Figure 40. Display
● Select the Mirror check box to enable all connected displays to use the same display settings configured on the primary display.
Configuring the thin client local settings 147
If you clear the Mirror check box, the Span mode is enabled.
Blocks that are displayed on the screen represent the number of displays connected to the thin client. Each block represents a single display screen.
Figure 41. Dual display setup
Every display contains a unique display order number and display configuration. You can move the blocks horizontally or vertically and construct the multidisplay layout in mixed directions. To construct a new display layout, move the blocks to your preferred position, and click Apply . A new display layout is created. However, when the block is moved to an incorrect position, the system sets the block to its default position.
NOTE: The Wyse 5070 Extended thin client supports up to six monitors. The Wyse 5470 Thin Client supports up to three simultaneous displays.
● Select the Make this my main display check box to set the display as primary display or the main screen. After you set the display as the main screen, the display block is highlighted in yellow, and the Make this my main display option is disabled for that display block. The Make this my main display option is now available for other display blocks.
NOTE: The Make this my main display option is effective only in Span Mode and always disabled in Mirror
Mode .
● Select the Disable current monitor check box if you want to disable a display.
If you want to enable the disabled display, from the Monitor drop-down list, select the disabled monitor, and clear the
Disable current monitor check box. Click the Test button and then click OK .
● From the Orientation drop-down list, select an option to rotate the display screen in different directions.
● From the Resolution drop-down list, select a supported display resolution.
NOTE: The default screen resolution on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client is 1366 x 768 or 1920 x 1080 depending on the configuration. The default screen resolution on the Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client is 1920 x 1080.
○ In Mirror Mode , the resolution list is derived from the intersection of resolutions in all connected displays.
○ In Span Mode , select a display block and change its resolution.
● From the Monitor drop-down list, select your preferred display.
3. Click Test .
The new display settings are applied, and you can preview the modified display.
4. Click OK to confirm the new settings.
Use the Identify option to know the display order number of the connected displays.
148 Configuring the thin client local settings
Using the On-Screen Display (OSD)
This section is applicable to Wyse 5470 All-in-One thin client.
Use the On-Screen Display (OSD) buttons on the right of the device to adjust the luminance of the backlight. Minimum is 1 and maximum is 100.
● Press and hold the first button from the top to increase brightness.
● Press and hold the second button from the top to decrease brightness.
● Press the third button from the top to turn off or turn on the screen.
Port preferences on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client
● HDMI, DisplayPort over USB Type-C, and USB Type-C ports are prioritized over the VGA port.
● When a USB Type-C display is present, there is no display on the VGA port.
● If a VGA display is present, a third display that is connected is prioritized and the VGA display is turned off.
● If a VGA display is not present, a third display that is connected is ignored, or a blank screen is displayed on the third screen.
Display limitation on Dell WD19 docking station
On Wyse 5470 Thin Client, ThinOS supports the following monitor connections using a Dell WD19 docking station:
● One Quad HD display at 30 Hz
● Two Full HD displays at 60 Hz
If two displays with resolutions greater than 1920 x 1080 are connected simultaneously, there can be the following behaviors:
● Random resolutions—You must change the resolutions to 1920 x 1080 or lower to make both displays work. Also, disconnect and reconnect the docking station to correct the resolution, if required.
● Second monitor is disabled—You must first enable the monitor in Display Setup , and then change the resolutions to 1920 x 1080 or lower to make both displays work. Also, disconnect and reconnect the docking station to correct the resolution, if required.
Vertical Synchronization
Vertical Synchronization or V-Sync enables the ThinOS client to synchronize the frame rate of a video with the monitor refresh rate to avoid screen tearing. Screen tearing occurs when the graphic processor delivers display frames more than your monitor can process. As a result, the image appears to be cut in half. Enabling VSync synchronizes the output video of the graphics card to the refresh rate of the monitor. V-Sync is enabled by default on ThinOS. V-Sync cannot be disabled in ThinOS 9.x.
Configure the external touch screen settings
Dell Technologies recommends that you use the default resolution while using touch screen. If you use a custom resolution, the touch screen does not calibrate accurately. By default, the touch monitor Dell P2418HT is supported. To use other touch screen monitors, you must configure the Bind Touch and Monitor settings either using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite.
Steps
1. Connect the touch monitor to the ThinOS client.
2. Go to System Information > Event Log and locate the information for the touch monitor. For example, screen1 [0xac10,
0x4114], Touchscreen [0x1fd2, 0x6103].
3. Open the Admin Policy Tool on the ThinOS client or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
4. On the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management and click Touch .
5. In the Bind Touch and Monitor section, click Add Row .
6. Specify the screen device ID. For example, ac104114.
7. Specify the touch device ID. For example, 1fd26103.
8. Click Save & Publish .
NOTE: Dell Technologies recommends that you use a direct DisplayPort, an HDMI, or a VGA cable for connecting the touch monitor and the thin client. If you are using a convertor, the touch function may not work by default.
Configuring the thin client local settings 149
However, it can work after you configure the Bind Touch and Monitor settings either using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse
Management Suite.
Configuring the external touch screen settings for VDI sessions
When you connect a touch monitor to the ThinOS client using a USB port, you must configure the settings in the Global
Connection Settings window.
● Citrix session —To use a touch monitor in a Citrix session, do the following:
1. On the ThinOS client, from the desktop menu, click Connect Manager .
2. Click Global Connection Settings .
3. Clear the USB devices redirection check box and click OK .
4. Start the Citrix session.
● Other VDI sessions —You do not have to modify the USB devices redirection setting. Connect the touch monitor to the
ThinOS client and start the VDI session.
NOTE: The right-click touch functionality does not work in all VDI sessions due to the limitation on VDI protocols.
Configuring the peripherals settings
Use the Peripherals dialog box to configure the settings for the keyboard, mouse, audio, serial, camera, and Bluetooth.
Configure the keyboard settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the keyboard settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Keyboard tab, and do the following: a. From the Keyboard Layout drop-down list, select a keyboard layout. The default layout is set to English (United
States) .
NOTE: Support for Macedonian, Macedonian – Standard, Belgian, and Belgian (Comma) keyboard layouts are added in ThinOS 9.1.2101 release. You can also use the Admin Policy Tool or the Wyse Management Suite policy settings to configure the keyboard layout. To configure the settings using Admin Policy Tool or Wyse Management Suite, on the Advanced Tab, go to Peripherals Managements > Keyboard and select the preferred Keyboard Layout . Blast session does not support Macedonian, Macedonian – Standard, Belgian, and Belgian (Comma) keyboard layouts.
b. From the Delay before Repeat drop-down list, select the time for Repeat Delay. The time specifies the pause between pressing the key on the keyboard and when the key starts repeating itself.
c. Click any of the following options to set the Repeat Rate :
● Slow
● Normal
● Fast
Repeat Rate specifies the speed at which the key repeats itself after you press and hold down a key on the keyboard.
d. Click any of the following options to set the Numlock status:
● None
● On
● Off
Numlock specifies whether the Numlock key on the keyboard must be turned on or turned off when you boot the terminal.
e. In the Disabled keys field, enter the keys on the keyboard that must be disabled. Use a comma to separate multiple entries.
150 Configuring the thin client local settings
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Function key combinations
The Wyse 5470 Thin Client supports the following Function (Fn) key combinations:
Table 44. Fn key combinations
Key
Fn + Esc
Fn + F1
ThinOS Local
Fn lock/unlock
Mute
Fn + F2
Fn + F3
Fn + F4
Fn + F5
Fn + F6
Fn + F7
Fn + F8
Fn + F9
Fn + F10
Fn + F11
Fn + F12
Fn + Ctrl
Fn + PrtScr
Fn + Right arrow
Fn + Left arrow
Fn + Up arrow
Fn + Down arrow
Fn + Insert
Volume down
Volume up
Not applicable—session only
Not applicable—session only
Not applicable—session only
Not applicable
Opens the ThinOS local display settings window
Not supported
Keyboard light
Screen dimming
Screen lighting
Right-click mouse
Disable wireless device
Go to the end of the page
Go to the home page
Page up
Page down
Sleep mode
ICA session
Fn lock/unlock
Mute
Volume down
Volume up
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not supported
Not applicable—ThinOS local only
Not applicable—ThinOS local only
Not applicable—ThinOS local only
Not supported
Not applicable—ThinOS local only
Go to the end of the page
Go to the home page
Page up
Page down
Not applicable - ThinOS local only
Configure the mouse settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the mouse settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Mouse tab, and do the following: a. To increase or decrease the mouse speed, move the Mouse Speed slider either to the right or left.
b. From the Pointer size drop-down list, select a value to increase the size of the local mouse pointer. Restart the computer for the change in pointer size to take effect.
c. Select the Swap left and right mouse buttons check box if you want to swap the mouse buttons for left-handed operations.
d. Select the Reverse mouse wheel scroll direction check box if you want to invert the direction of the mouse scroll wheel.
Configuring the thin client local settings 151
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the touchpad settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the touchpad settings on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Touchpad tab, and do the following: a. To increase or decrease the mouse speed, move the Touchpad Speed slider either to the right or left.
b. Select the Swap left and right touchpad buttons check box if you want to swap the touchpad buttons for left-handed operations.
c. Select the Reverse touchpad wheel scroll direction check box if you want to invert the direction of the touchpad scroll wheel.
d. Select the Disable touchpad check box if you want to disable the touchpad on the device.
e. Click the Enable Timeout toggle switch if you to disable the touchpad while typing using the integrated keyboard.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Touchpad gestures
This section is applicable to the Wyse 5470 Thin Client.
The touchpad on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client contains two buttons for the right and left mouse-clicks. The following table lists the supported touchpad gestures on the Wyse 5470 Thin Client:
Table 45. Touchpad gestures
Touchpad gesture
Moving the mouse cursor
Additional information
Moving with one finger, the entire touchpad including the area with the buttons can be used for the mouse cursor movement.
NOTE: The sensitivity of the cursor movement on the area with the buttons is slower compared to the other areas. This design is for the stability of the buttons.
Left-click
Right-click
Double-click
Moving windows
Zoom
Scroll
● Tapping with one finger anywhere on the touchpad works as the mouse left-click.
● Pressing the left button on the touchpad works as the mouse left-click.
● Tapping with two fingers anywhere on the touchpad works as the mouse right-click.
● Pressing the right button on the touchpad as the mouse right-click.
● Tapping two times with one finger anywhere on the touchpad works as the mouse double-click.
● Pressing the left button twice on the touchpad works as mouse double-click.
● Press and hold the left button, and move the window by dragging a second finger on the touchpad.
● Dragging a window by tapping twice on the touchpad with one finger.
Placing two fingers on the touchpad and pinching or stretching out—Not supported.
Tapping two fingers and moving up or down.
Configure the audio settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the audio settings on your thin client:
152 Configuring the thin client local settings
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Audio tab, and do the following: a. From the Playback Devices drop-down list, select the type of the audio device.
NOTE: From ThinOS 9.1.2101 onwards, HDMI/DP audio options are displayed only if a monitor that supports audio is connected. This change can be observed on Wyse 5070 Thin Client, Wyse 5470 Thin Client, and Wyse 5470
All-in-One Thin Client. You can hot plug the Dell WD 19 docking station but do not hot plug monitors to the docking station. When two monitors that supports display audio are connected to Dell WD19 docking station, the HDMI/DP audio option disappears if you remove one of the monitors.
● Move the slider either to the right or left to control the volume settings for playback devices.
● Select the Mute check box to mute the audio.
● Select the Speaker check box to enable the onboard speaker.
b. From the Recorded Devices drop-down list, select the type of the record device.
● Move the slider either to the right or left to control the volume settings for record devices.
● Select the Mute check box to mute the audio.
c. Use the Recorder tab to collect information about the speaker and microphone being used. You can examine the performance of the speaker and microphone being used.
3. Click OK to save your changes.
PulseAudio
PulseAudio is a sound server that runs on ThinOS to deliver audio and manage audio devices. PulseAudio supports multiple audio devices when using real-time audio applications in ICA sessions.
NOTE: You cannot disable the PulseAudio feature on your ThinOS client.
Configure the serial settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the serial settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Serial tab and do the following: a. Click any of the Select Port options to select a COM port. The default port is set to COM 1 .
b. From the Baud Rate drop-down list, select the Baud Rate. The Baud rate specifies the number of signal changes that occur per second. The default value is 9600.
c. Click any of the Parity options to set the parity property for the serial port connection.
d. Click any of the Stop options to set the stop bits for the serial port connection. The default value is 1.
e. Click any of the Size options to set the character size for the serial port connection. The default value is 8.
f. Click any of the Flow Control options to set the flow control of bytes in the serial port connection.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the camera device
About this task
This section describes how to enable the camera that is connected to your thin client.
Configuring the thin client local settings 153
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Camera tab.
3. From the Device drop-down list, select a camera device that is connected to your thin client.
4. Click Preview .
The camera is turned on and you can see yourself or whatever the camera is pointed at.
5. Click Stop to stop the camera preview.
6. Click OK to save your settings.
For Wyse 5470 and Wyse 5470 All-in-One thin clients, it is recommended to use a camera such as Logitech C930e that supports hardware encoding. The integrated camera on the thin clients does not support hardware encoding, so the performance is limited as follows:
● On the Wyse 5470 Thin Client with RTME-enabled, the camera performance on Skype for Business is limited to a maximum resolution of 640 x 360 using HD configuration, 960 x 540 using Full HD configuration, and 1280 x 720 if
Logitech C930e camera is used.
● On the Wyse 5470 All-in-One Thin Client with RTME-enabled, the camera performance on Skype for Business is limited to a maximum resolution of 960 x 540, and 1280 x 720 if Logitech C930e camera is used.
● On a JVDI-enabled client, the CPU usage of the integrated camera is 10% higher than the CPU usage of Logitech C930e camera. The difference in the CPU usage is observed while video calling on Cisco Jabber in the ICA session.
For information about supported cameras, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/ support .
Configure the Bluetooth settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the Bluetooth settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Peripherals .
The Peripherals dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Bluetooth tab.
Bluetooth-enabled devices such as headsets and mouses that are available in the thin client environment are listed on the
Bluetooth page. The following attributes are displayed in the list:
● Name —Specifies the name of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
● Type —Specifies the type of the Bluetooth-enabled devices, such as headsets, mouses, and keyboards.
ThinOS supports Human Interface Devices (HID) devices. HID includes mouse and keyboard. The maximum number of
HIDs that can be connected is seven.
NOTE: ThinOS supports Bluetooth headsets, but only one headset can be connected. Call level audio quality on headsets is supported. However, multimedia is not supported. Other types of Bluetooth devices are not scanned and supported.
● Status —The Bluetooth page has two columns, namely, Status and Paired.
Table 46. Bluetooth status
Attribute
Status
Value
Connected
Connecting
Disconnected
Summary
The Bluetooth device is connected to the ThinOS device. It is ready to be used.
The Bluetooth device is connecting to the ThinOS device.
The Bluetooth device is not connected to the ThinOS device.
Paired Yes The Bluetooth device is paired with the ThinOS device.
No The Bluetooth device is not paired with the ThinOS device.
● Address —Displays the address of the Bluetooth device that is connected to your thin client.
154 Configuring the thin client local settings
The following are the user scenarios and corresponding Bluetooth statuses that are displayed on the Bluetooth page:
Table 47. User scenarios
User scenario
Device turned off
Device turned on
Device disconnected from ThinOS
Status
Disconnected | Paired
Connected | Paired
Disconnected | Not Paired
3. Select a Bluetooth device that is not connected, and click Connect . If the Bluetooth device is connected successfully, the status is displayed as Connected in the Bluetooth window. The following are the functions that are available:
● Scan —All Bluetooth devices enter into Page Scan mode. Different Bluetooth devices enter into the Page Scan mode at different instances such as when a specific button is pressed three times or a specific button is pressed and held until the LED turns blue.
● Connect —Select a particular Bluetooth enabled device, and click Connect to connect the selected device to the thin client. If the Bluetooth device is connected successfully, the status is displayed as Connected in the Bluetooth window.
● Remove —Select a particular Bluetooth device, and click Remove to disconnect and remove the device from the list.
● Auto Connect function —The Auto Connect function is designed for HIDs.
○ ThinOS has no HIDs connected such as USB or Bluetooth HIDs.
○ The Bluetooth HIDs are configured as Page Scan mode.
When you start the ThinOS client, the Bluetooth HIDs can connect to ThinOS automatically without scanning or pairing operations. The Bluetooth HIDs automatically reconnect after you restart the ThinOS client.
● Reconnect function —The Reconnect function is designed for HIDs and headsets.
When you restart the system with the Bluetooth device (HID/headset) that is already paired and connected, the
Bluetooth device automatically reconnects within a few seconds.
For example, you can hover the Bluetooth mouse, and then click a few times for the Bluetooth mouse to reconnect successfully. The Bluetooth headset reconnects automatically, but might require you to manually close or reopen the device on certain occasions.
4. Click OK to save your settings.
Secure Digital cards
You can plug in a Secure Digital (SD) card into the Wyse 5470 Thin Client. The SD card works as a storage device.
Configure the Jabra Xpress headset settings
ThinOS enables you to configure and manage Jabra Xpress headsets that are connected to the thin client. Use Wyse
Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS to configure the headset settings.
Prerequisites
Go to jabraxpress.jabra.com
and download the ZIP archive file to a local HTTP server.
Steps
1. Create a .INI file with the following commands.
[JDU]
ShowGui=true
RunOnSystemStart=true
LocalServerURL=http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:port
[ADD]
AutoPost=false
ServerURL=
Configuring the thin client local settings 155
For more information about the usage of commands, see the User's Guide at jabraxpress.jabra.com
.
2. Open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
3. In the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click Device Headset Settings .
4. Click the Enable Jabra Xpress toggle switch to enable the option.
5. Browse and upload the configuration file.
6. From the drop-down list, select the uploaded configuration file.
7. Click Save & Publish .
8. Restart the thin client for the settings to take effect.
Next steps
1. Start the ThinOS client.
2. Connect the Jabra Xpress headset to your thin client.
The Jabra Device Updater window is displayed if you have set the ShowGui parameter to True .
Configure the EPOS headset settings
ThinOS enables you to configure and manage EPOS headsets that are connected to the thin client. Use Wyse Management
Suite or Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS to configure the headset settings.
Steps
1. Create a text file with the EPOS Connect configuration details.
NOTE: Ensure that you specify a valid tenant ID and a tenant URL. Log file configuration is optional.
For example: log_filepath = /tmp/epos-connect/Logs/ tenant_filepath = <filepath> log_output = CONSOLE log_level = TRACE proxy_setting = <proxyserver> tenant_id = <id> tenant_url = <url>
Table 48. EPOS Connect configuration details
Command log_filepath
Description
Specifies the log file path.
tenant_filepath log_output log_level
Specifies the tenant configuration and device settings file path.
Specifies where the log entries are to be saved. Default is set to CONSOLE. Change the value to FILE if you want to write log entires to a log file.
Specifies the log level. Default is set to OFF. Change the value to one of the following options as per your preference:
● TRACE
● DEBUG
● INFO
● ERROR
● WARN
● EXCEPTION
● OFF proxy_setting tenant_id
Specifies the proxy server.
Specify the tenant ID.
tenant_url Specify the tenant URL.
2. Open the Admin Policy Tool on ThinOS or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
156 Configuring the thin client local settings
3. In the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click Device Headset Settings .
4. Click the Enable EPOS Connect toggle switch to enable the option.
5. Browse and upload the configuration file.
6. From the drop-down list, select the uploaded configuration file.
7. Click Save & Publish .
8. Restart the thin client for changes to take effect.
Next steps
1. Start the ThinOS client.
2. Connect the EPOS headset to your thin client.
NOTE: It is recommended that you use the silent deploy type during the firmware upgrade process.
Configure the HID Fingerprint reader settings
ThinOS supports using HID Global Identification Software with HID Fingerprint reader in a Citrix ICA session.
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have installed HID Finger Reader.pkg
on your client.
Steps
1. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
2. On the Advanced tab, expand Session Settings , and click Citrix Session Settings .
3. In the Other Citrix Virtual Channels Settings section, enable HID Fingerprint Reader .
4. In the UC Virtual Channel Settings section , disable all UC settings.
NOTE: Citrix Workspace App 2012 has a virtual channels count limitation. For more information, see
Citrix multiple virtual channels
.
5. Click Save & Publish , and restart the client to make the setting change successful.
6. Plug in the HID Fingerprint reader device.
7. On the ThinOS client, open Admin Policy Tool or go to the ThinOS 9.x policy settings on Wyse Management Suite.
8. On the Advanced tab, expand Peripheral Management , and click USB Redirection .
9. Click Add Row in the vUSB Force Local section, and enter the fingerprint device ID 0xVIDPID .
10. Launch the ICA desktop.
You can use the HID Fingerprint Reader in the ICA desktop. For the list of supported devices, see the Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1
Operating System Release Notes at www.dell.com/support .
NOTE: HID Fingerprint Reader can be configured in ICA desktop without the configuration changes in step 8 and step 9.
However, Dell Technologies recommends that you use this configuration for better user experience.
Configuring the printer settings
Use the Printer Setup dialog box to configure network printers and local printers that are connected to the thin client. Through its USB ports, a thin client can support multiple printers. If more than one printer is to be used and another port is not available on your thin client and the port that is to be used must be shared with a USB modem converter, connect a USB hub to the port.
Based on the Citrix Host Printer Policy settings, ThinOS supports the following:
● Device-Specific Printer Driver support —This method allows Citrix hosts to automatically create client redirected printer queues based on the peripheral management printers settings of the ThinOS client. The following details are used by the host print manager to automatically create the printer queues:
○ Name —Printer queue name.
○ Printer ID (Printer Identification) —Printer driver name.
Configuring the thin client local settings 157
● Citrix Universal Print Driver support —This method allows Citrix hosts to automatically create printer queues based on the peripheral management printers settings of the ThinOS client. The following details are used by the host print manager to automatically create the printer queues:
○ Name —Printer queue name.
○ Class —Printer class that is associated by the Citrix host registry to a printer-specific driver name.
NOTE: ThinOS 8.6 supports the association of PS, PCL5, and PCL4 classes. However, ThinOS 9.0 associations are limited to the PS class only.
Limitations
● The ThinOS solution to support the client printer redirection functionality is limited to Type 3 printers only. However, the solution is subject to changes in the future according to the changes made by Citrix.
● ThinOS supports only PS class when using the Citrix Universal Print Driver policy to automatically create ThinOS client redirected printers. PCL5 and PCL4 classes are not supported. This is a Citrix limitation.
Configure the ports settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the port settings on your thin client:
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Ports tab, and do the following:
Figure 42. Ports a.
Select Port —Select a port from the drop-down list. Selecting LPT1 or LPT2 sets the connection to a direct-connected
USB printer. If you are using the Wyse 5070 Extended Thin Client, select LPT2 for the USB printer.
b.
Printer Name —(Required) Enter the name of the printer.
c.
Printer Identification —(Required) Enter the type or model of the printer in the exact text of the Windows printer driver name—including capitalizations and spaces.
Printer mapping in a Citrix session on ThinOS uses Citrix UPD (Universal Printer Driver). You can enter any string in the
Printer Identification field.
d.
Printer Class —Select the printer class from the drop-down list as PS .
e.
Enable the printer device —Select this option to enable the directly-connected printer. It enables the device to be displayed on the remote host.
158 Configuring the thin client local settings
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configure the LPDs settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the LPD settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the LPDs tab, and do the following when printing to a non-Windows network printer:
Figure 43. LPD
NOTE: Be sure to check with your vendor that the printer can accept Line Printer Request print requests.
a.
Select LPD —Select the LPD port from the drop-down list.
b.
Printer Name —Enter the name of the printer. If you do not specify a printer name, the LPD queue name is used automatically.
c.
Printer Identification —(Required) Enter the type or model of the printer in the exact text of the Windows printer driver name—including capitalizations and spaces.
Printer mapping in a Citrix session on ThinOS uses Citrix UPD (Universal Printer Driver). You can enter any string in the
Printer Identification field.
d.
LPD Hosts —(Required) The DNS or WINS name of the server for the network printer. An IP address of the printer on the network can also be entered.
e.
LPD Queue Name —(Required) An LPD host maintains a named queue for each supported printer. Enter the name of the queue associated with the printer to be used.
This name can be different for each vendor. This field is required and must be correct so that the network printer accepts incoming print jobs properly.
f.
Printer Class —Select the printer class from the drop-down list as PS .
g.
Enable the printer device —Must be selected to enable the printer. It enables the device to be displayed on the remote host.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Configuring the thin client local settings 159
Configure the SMBs settings
About this task
This section describes how to configure the SMB settings on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the SMBs tab, and do the following when printing to a Windows network printer:
Figure 44. SMB a.
Select SMB —Select the SMB port from the drop-down list.
b.
Printer Name —Enter the name of the printer. If you do not specify a printer name, the SMB shared printer name is used automatically.
c.
Printer Identification —(Required) Enter the type or model of the printer in the exact text of the Windows printer driver name—including capitalizations and spaces.
Printer mapping in a Citrix session on ThinOS uses Citrix UPD (Universal Printer Driver). You can enter any string in the
Printer Identification field.
d.
\\Host\Printer —(Required) Enter the IP address, computer name, or FQDN of the host and specify the shared name of the printer. After you specify the values and move the cursor, the SMB credentials dialog box is displayed which prompts you to enter the host username, password, and the domain name.
NOTE: If the host has not joined any domain, enter WORKGROUP in the domain name field.
e.
Printer Class —Select the printer class from the drop-down list as PS .
f.
Enable the printer device —Must be selected to enable the printer. It enables the device to be displayed on the remote host.
3. Click OK to save your settings.
160 Configuring the thin client local settings
Using the printer setup options
About this task
This section describes how to configure the printer setup options.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Printer .
The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Options tab, and select a printer from the Default Printer drop-down list.
Figure 45. Options
3. Click OK to save your settings.
Using the Help
When you click the Help tab, the following message is displayed in the text box.
Printer Identification is supplied by printer device. Change it to a Window’s printer driver name or setup a driver mapping file.
Reset to factory defaults
A high-privileged or stand-alone user can reset the thin client to factory default settings from the Shutdown dialog box.
Shutdown reset is disabled for custom-privileged and nonprivileged users, regardless of the lockdown state.
About this task
This section describes how to reset the thin client to factory default settings.
WARNING: Shutdown reset impacts all configuration items, including but not limited to, network configuration and connections defined in local NV-RAM. However, the terminal name remains unaltered.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click Shutdown .
The Shutdown dialog box is displayed.
2. Select the Reset the system setting to factory default check box to restore your system settings to default factory settings.
3. Click OK .
Configuring the thin client local settings 161
10
Using the system tools
Use the System Tools option to view all the connected devices, installed packages, and imported certificates into the ThinOS client.
About this task
This section describes how to access the system tools on your thin client.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Tools .
The System Tools dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Devices tab to view all the locally attached devices, including USB, on applicable platforms. The details about the displays connected to the thin client are also displayed.
Figure 46. Devices
3. Click the Certificates tab to view the list of certificates that are imported to the thin client.
162 Using the system tools
Figure 47. Certificates
● Use the Enable/Disable FIPS slide switch to enable or disable the Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS)
Publication 140-2 authentication compliance.
● From the Import From drop-down list, select USB Storage , and click Import . Browse and select the appropriate certificate that is stored in the USB drive.
● Select a certificate from the list, and click View Certificate to details such as version, validity, and serial number. You can also view the certificate path and certificate status.
● To manually request a certificate for your client, Click Request Certificate , provide the required details, and then click
Request Certificate again.
4. Click the Packages tab to view the list of ThinOS packages installed on the thin client.
● To delete a single package, select the package and click Delete .
● To delete all the packages, click Delete all .
NOTE: In every ThinOS release, the packages may be updated to the latest version.
5. Click OK to save your settings.
Simplified Certificate Enrollment Protocol
Simplified Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) was used in a closed network where all end-points are trusted. The goal of
SCEP is to support the secure issuance of certificates to network devices in a scalable manner. Within an enterprise domain, it enables network devices that do not run with domain credentials to enroll for certificates from a Certification Authority (CA).
At the end of the transactions that are defined in this protocol, the network device has a private key and associated certificate that is issued by a CA. Applications on the device may use the key and its associated certificate to interact with other entities on the network. The most common usage of this certificate on a network device is to authenticate the device in an IPSec session.
ThinOS is treated as a network device. The functionality of ThinOS SCEP includes manual certificate request, automatic certificate request, and automatic renewal of certificate.
Using the system tools 163
Request the certificate manually
About this task
To request the certificate manually, do the following:
Steps
1. Go to System Tools > Certificates > Request Certificate .
The Request Certificate dialog box is displayed.
164 Using the system tools
Figure 48. Request Certificate
2. Enter the appropriate values in the Request Certificate dialog box, and then click the Request Certificate button.
The certificate request is sent to the server, and the client receives the response from server and installs both CA certificate and client certificate.
3. Click Ok to save your changes.
The CA Certificate Hash type supports MD5, SHA1, and SHA256. The request server URL can be an HTTP or HTTPS link.
You can add the protocol prefix before the URL.
Using the system tools 165
Request the certificate automatically using Wyse Management
Suite
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite.
2. Go to Groups & Configs and select your preferred group.
3. Expand Edit Policies and click ThinOS 9.x
.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
4. In the Advanced tab, click Privacy & Settings .
5. Click SCEP .
6. Click the Enable Auto Enrollment slider switch to enable automatic certificate enrollment using the SCEP server.
7. Click the Enable Auto Renew slider switch to automatically renew the certificate.
8. Click the Select Install CA Certificate slider switch to install the root CA's certificate as a trusted certificate after successfully getting the client certificate.
9. Specify the country/region name, state, location, and other details.
10. Click Save & Publish .
NOTE: You can also configure the SCEP Administrator URL, Admin User, Admin User Password, and Admin User
Domain options to request for SCEP certificate. If the enrollment password is not specified, the client uses the SCEP
Administrator URL, Admin User, Admin User Password, and Admin User Domain options to request SCEP. If you specify the enrollment password, the enrollment password is used for SCEP, even though the password entered is invalid. In this scenario, the SCEP Administrator URL, Admin User, Admin User Password, and Admin User Domain options are ignored.
Trusted Platform Module version 2.0
Wyse 5070, Wyse 5470, and Wyse 5470 All-in-One thin clients support disk encryption and decryption through Trusted Platform
Module (TPM) version 2.0. If the key in TPM does not match the current build, the ThinOS will reset to factory settings.
NOTE: Do not change the TPM status in BIOS or clear TPM.
The following SSL/TLS ciphers are supported:
● TLS1.2_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
● TLS1.2_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
● TLS1.3_AES256_GCM_SHA384
● TLS1.3_AES128_GCM_SHA256
166 Using the system tools
11
Using Wyse Management Suite
Functional areas of Wyse Management Suite console
The Wyse Management Suite console is organized into the following functional areas:
About this task
● The Dashboard page provides information about the current status on each functional area of the system.
● The Groups & Configs page employs a hierarchical group policy management for device configuration. Optionally, subgroups of the global group policy can be created to categorize devices according to corporate standards. For example, devices may be grouped based on job function, device type, and so on.
● The Users page enables local users and users imported from the Active Directory to be assigned global administrator, group administrator, and viewer roles to log in to Wyse Management Suite. Users are given permissions to perform operations based on the roles assigned to them.
● The Devices page enables you to view and manage devices, device types, and device-specific configurations.
● The Apps & Data page provides management of device applications, operating system images, policies, certificate files, logos, and wallpaper images.
● The Rules page enables you to add, edit, and enable or disable rules such as auto grouping and alert notifications.
● The Jobs page enables you to create jobs for tasks such as reboot, WOL, and application or image policy that need to be deployed on registered devices.
● The Events page enables you to view and audit system events and alerts.
● The Portal Administration page enables you to configure various system settings such as local repository configuration, license subscription and more.
Managing groups and configurations
The Groups & Configs page enables you to define policies that are required to configure your devices. You can create sub groups of the global group policies and categorize devices based on your requirements. For example, devices may be grouped based on job functions, device type, and so on.
By default, the Default Device Policy Group and Default User Policy Group are present on the Groups & Configs page.
Devices inherit policies in the order that they are created. The settings that are configured in a default policy group are applied as default settings in all the policies listed in the default policy group. In a group, all devices present in that group have default policy group as their default settings.
Create a default device policy group
You can create groups for the global device group policies and categorize devices based on your requirements.
Steps
1. On the Groups & Configs page, click the Default Device Policy Group option.
2. Click .
3. In the Add New Group dialog box, enter the Group Name and Description .
Using Wyse Management Suite 167
4. Select the This is a ThinOS Select group parent option to create a parent select group for ThinOS devices. This step is optional.
For more information, see
.
5. In the Registration tab, select the Enabled check box under Group Token.
6. Enter the group token.
7. In the Administration tab, you can select the name of group administrators who are tasked with managing this group. From the Available Group Admins box, select the particular group and click the right arrow to move it to the Assigned Group
Admins box. To move one group from the Assigned Group Admins to Available Group Admins , do the reverse. This step is optional.
8. Click Save .
The group is added to the list of available groups on the Groups & Configs page.
NOTE: The devices can be registered to a group by entering the group token which is available in the Groups and
Configs page for the respective group.
Create a ThinOS Select group
Steps
1. On the Groups & Configs page, click the Default Device Policy Group option.
2. Click .
3. In the Add New Group dialog box, enter the Group Name and Description .
4. Select the This is a ThinOS Select group parent option.
5. Select the name of the group administrators who are tasked with managing this group. From the Available Group Admins box, select the particular group and click the right arrow to move it to the Assigned Group Admins box. To move one group from the Assigned Group Admins to Available Group Admins , do the reverse. This step is optional.
6. Click Save .
The group is added to the list of available groups on the Groups & Configs page.
To add sub groups to the created parent group, click the parent group on the Groups & Configs page, and follow the steps that are mentioned in
.
NOTE: The parent select group can have 10 child select group and you can register the devices to child select group.
Profiles can be configured for other operating systems. The created profiles are the same as other custom groups.
NOTE: Some policies that are changed in sub groups require a client reboot for changes to take effect.
Edit a ThinOS select group
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page and click the ThinOS select group that you want to edit.
2. Click .
3. In the Editing Default Policy group dialog box, edit the group information such as Group Name and Description .
4. In the Administration tab, select the name of group administrators who are tasked with managing this group. From the
Available Group Admins box, select the particular group and click the right arrow to move it to the Assigned Group
Admins box. To move one group from the Assigned Group Admins to Available Group Admins , click the left arrow. This step is optional.
5. Click Save .
Edit a default device policy group
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page and select the Default Device Policy Group .
168 Using Wyse Management Suite
2. In the Editing Default Device Policy Group dialog box, edit the required group information.
3. Click Save .
Create a user policy group
You can create groups for the global user group policies and categorize users and devices based on their user groups.
Steps
1. On the Groups & Configs page, click the Default User Policy Group option.
2. Click .
3. In the Add New Group dialog box, enter the Group Name , Description , Domain , AD Attribute (AD group or OU group) and AD Attribute Name which is the name present in the AD domain. You must use the Group Name as the AD Attribute name .
Using Wyse Management Suite 169
Figure 49. Add a new group
NOTE: If the AD group is inside an OU group in the domain, then you must select the OU group as the AD Attribute.
4. Select the name of the group administrators who are tasked with managing this group.
5. From the Available Group Admins box, select the particular group and click the right arrow to move it to the Assigned
Group Admins box.
To move one group from the Assigned Group Admins to Available Group Admins , do the reverse.
6. Click Save .
The group is added to the list of available groups on the Groups & Configs page.
NOTE: A user policy group must be mapped to an AD group or an organizational unit, but not both.
170 Using Wyse Management Suite
7. Select the Device Group Mapping option to import user groups with device mapping to control the configurations that are applied to all device groups by default.
AD User groups which are imported into Wyse Management Suite can be mapped to the respective device group. By mapping the devices, they do not receive unwanted user group policies.
NOTE: By default, user groups are not mapped to a device group. If you select the Default device group policy, all sub-device groups are selected. This feature is available only on Wyse Management Suite Pro license. You can import
100 user groups to Wyse Management Suite.
Edit a user policy group
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page and select the default user policy group.
2. Click .
3. In the Editing Default User Policy group dialog box, edit the required group information.
4. Click Save .
Edit an unmanaged group
Devices that belong to the unmanaged group do not use licenses or receive configuration or application-based policies. To add devices to an unmanaged group, use the unmanaged group device registration key as part of auto registration or manual device registration.
Steps
1. On the Groups & Configs page, select Unmanaged Group .
2. Click .
The Editing Unmanaged Group page is displayed. The Group Name displays the name of the group.
3. Edit the following details:
● Description —Displays a brief description of the group.
● Group Token —Select this option to enable the group token.
4. Click Save .
NOTE: For a public cloud, the group token for an unmanaged group must be enabled to register devices. For a private cloud, the group token for an unmanaged group is automatically enabled.
Remove a group
As an administrator, you can remove a group from the group hierarchy.
Steps
1. In the Groups & Configs page, select the group that you want to delete.
2. Click .
A warning message indicating that this action removes one or more groups from the group tree hierarchy is displayed.
3. From the drop-down list, select a new group to move the users and devices in the current group.
4. Click Remove Group .
NOTE: When a device group is deleted, all the devices of the group are moved to a selected device group. When a user group is deleted, there are no devices or users who are associated with it.
Using Wyse Management Suite 171
Create and import bulk device exception file
From Wyse Management Suite 3.1, you can deploy device exception configurations to multiple ThinOS 9.x devices.
Steps
1. Create a bulk device exception file. To create a file, do any of the following:
● Create a group policy for a test group and then export that policy to a file. If the configuration contains passwords, they are replaced with * in the exported file. For example:
{
"WMSVersion": "4.6.8",
"exportedDate": "1581466633677",
"deviceTypes": [
{
"type": 6,
"configurations": {
"version": "0.0.1",
"sequence": 1581466506281,
"parameters": {
"AdminModeUsername": {
"value": "admin",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"AdminModePassword": {
"value": "********",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"TerminalName": {
"value": "outpatient",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"TimeServer": {
"value": "10.10.10.10",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"timeZone": {
"value": "America/Phoenix",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"TerminalNameCapital": {
"value": "yes",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"DeviceNICDefault": {
"value": "Wlan",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
},
"AdminMode": {
"value": "yes",
"updatedAt": "1581466506234"
}
}
}
}
]
}
● Create a .json file using the following format:
{
"devices": {
<serialnumber>: {
"parameters": {
"<parametername>": {
"value": <value>
172 Using Wyse Management Suite
},
"<parametername>": {
"value": <value>
}
}, configurations: [<configuration name>]
}
}
"configurations": {
<configurationName>: {
"<parametername>": {
"value": <value>
},
"<parametername>": {
"value": <value>
}
}
}
}
For example,
{
"devices": {
"9EPDL900051": {
"parameters": {
"TerminalName": {
"value" : "Cubical 5 - Floor 3"
},
"TerminalNameCapital": {
"value": "no"
}
},
configurations: ["westWingExceptions"]
},
"5LGDO600108": {
"parameters": {
"TerminalName": {
"value" : "Cubical 15 - Floor 2"
},
"TerminalNameCapital": {
"value": "no"
}
},
configurations: ["westWingExceptions"]
}
},
"configurations": {
"westWingExceptions": {
"DeviceNICDefault": {
"value": "Wlan"
},
"timeZone": {
"value": "America/Phoenix"
Using Wyse Management Suite 173
},
"TimeServer": {
"value": "10.10.10.10"
},
"TerminalNameCapital": {
"value": "yes"
},
"AdminMode": {
"value": "yes"
},
"AdminModeUsername": {
"value": "admin"
},
"AdminModePassword": {
"value": "password"
}
}
}
}
2. Compress and encrypt the file.
NOTE: You can use 7-zip software to compress and encrypt the file.
NOTE: File size should not be more than 1 MB.
3. Go to Groups & Configs and click Import Policies .
The Import Policies Wizard screen is displayed.
4. Select Bulk Device Exceptions .
5. Click Browse and select the password encrypted .zip file.
6. Click Next .
Select the device type configurations to import page is displayed.
7. Click Next .
NOTE: Since you can bulk import a device exception file for ThinOS 9.x devices, you cannot configure the options in the page.
8. Enter the .zip file password that was used to zip the .json file.
9. Click Next .
A summary of the bulk device exceptions import is displayed.
10. Click Import .
After the configurations are imported, a report generation link is generated in the Group & Configs page which can be downloaded. A success message is displayed in the Group & Configs page.
NOTE: If a device is not registered and the configurations are imported, exceptions are applied to this device only if the device registers with one of the preloaded serial numbers device in the next 30 days.
NOTE: If a device is already registered and the configurations are imported with device serial number, then the device exceptions are applied to the device.
NOTE: Imported file is a password protected. AES-256 and ZipCrypto encryption is supported.
NOTE: Configurations such as certificates, wallpaper, logo, and so on, with resources associated with them are not imported.
Edit the ThinOS 9.x policy settings
Prerequisites
● Create a group, with a group token, for the devices you want to push the application package.
● Register the thin client to Wyse Management Suite.
174 Using Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. Go to the Groups & Configs page, and select a group.
2. From the Edit Policies drop-down menu, click ThinOS 9.x
.
The Configuration Control | ThinOS window is displayed.
Figure 50. Configuration Control | ThinOS
3. Click the Advanced or Standard option.
4. Select the options that you want to configure.
5. In the respective fields, click the option that you want to configure.
You can use the Global search option to find the relevant settings or parameters that are available in the Policy Settings. The search result displays the settings in the following order:
● Setting
● Parameter Group
● Parameter sub group
● Parameter
6. Configure the options as required.
7. Click Save & Publish .
NOTE: After you click Save & Publish , the configured settings are also displayed in the Standard tab.
Managing devices
The Device page enables you tp perform a routine device management task by using the management console. To locate the inventory of the devices, click the Devices tab. You can view a subset of the devices by using various filter criteria, such as groups or subgroups, device type, operating system type, status, subnet, platform, or time zone.
You can sort the device list based on the following:
● Type
● Platform
● Operating system version
● Serial number
● IP address
● Last user details
● Group details
● Last check-in time
● Registration status
● Write filter status
Using Wyse Management Suite 175
To view the Device Details page of a particular device, click the device entry that is listed on the page. All the configuration parameters of the device and the group level at which each parameter is applied are displayed on the Device Details page.
You can set the configuration parameter that is specific to the device.
NOTE: Parameters that are configured in this section override any parameters that were configured at the groups and/or at the global level.
Search a device using filters on the Devices page
About this task
To search a device using filters on the Devices page , do the following:
Steps
1. Go to the Devices page.
2. From the Configuration Groups drop-down list, select either the default policy group or the groups which are added by an administrator.
3. From the Status drop-down list, select any one of the following options:
● Registration
○ Registered
○ Pre-registered
○ Not Registered
○ Compliant
○ Pending
○ Non-Compliant
● Online Status
○ Online
○ Offline
○ Unknown
● Others
○ Recently Added
4. From the OS Type drop-down list, select ThinOS.
5. From the OS Subtype drop-down list, select a subtype for your operating system.
6. From the Platform drop-down list, select a platform.
7. From the OS Version drop-down list, select an OS version.
8. From the Agent Version drop-down list, select an agent version.
9. From the Subnet/Prefix drop-down list, select a subnet.
10. From the Timezone drop-down list, select the time zone.
11. From the Device Tag drop-down list, select the device tag.
12. Click Save to save the current filter.
The Save Current Filter dialog box is displayed.
13. Enter the name and description for the filter.
14. Select the check box to set the current filter as the default option.
15. Click Save Filter .
View the display parameters
From Wyse Management Suite 3.1, you can view the display setup of the devices running a Windows Embedded and ThinLinux operating system. You can view the vendor name, model number, serial number, resolution, aspect ratio, mode, alignment, and rotation details of the display setup.
Steps
1. Go to the Devices page.
176 Using Wyse Management Suite
2. Apply the filters to find the preferred device.
The preferred device list is displayed.
3. Click any of the displayed devices.
The Device Details page is displayed.
4. Go to System Info > Peripherals .
You can view the display setup details.
Figure 51. Display parameters
View the virtual NIC details
From Wyse Management Suite 3.1, you can view the network adapter details of the devices running a Windows Embedded and
ThinLinux operating system. You can view the adapter name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway IP address, and DNS server details of the Network Adaptor.
Steps
1. Go to the Devices page.
2. Apply the filters to find the preferred device.
The preferred device list is displayed.
3. Click any of the displayed devices.
The Device Details page is displayed.
4. Go to System Info > Network Details - Network Adapters .
You can view the virtual NIC details in the Network Details - Network Adapters section.
Figure 52. Network Details - Network Adapters
View the BIOS details
From Wyse Management Suite 3.1, you can view the BIOS parameter value on the Device Details page.
Steps
1. Go to the Devices page.
2. Apply the filters to find the preferred device.
Using Wyse Management Suite 177
The preferred device list is displayed.
3. Click any of the displayed devices.
The Device Details page is displayed. You can view the BIOS details in the BIOS settings section of the SystemInfo tab.
Managing Jobs
The Jobs page enables you to schedule and manage jobs in the management console.
In this page you can see jobs based on the following filtering options:
● Configuration Groups —From the drop-down menu, select the configuration group type.
● Scheduled by —From the drop-down menu, select a scheduler who performs the scheduling activity. The available options are:
○ Admin
￭ App Policy
￭ Image Policy
￭ Device Commands
○ System
￭ Publish Group Configuration
￭ Others
● OS Type —From the drop-down menu, select the operating system.
● Status —From the drop-down menu, select the status of the job. The available options are:
○ Scheduled
○ Running/In Progress
○ Completed
○ Canceled
○ Failed
● Detail Status —From the drop-down menu, select the status in detail. The available options are:
○ 1 or more failed
○ 1 or more pending
○ 1 or more In progress
○ 1 or more canceled
○ 1 or more completed
● More Actions —From the drop-down menu, select the Sync BIOS Admin Password option. The Sync BIOS Admin
Password Job window is displayed.
Schedule a device command job
Steps
1. On the Jobs page, click Schedule device command job .
The Device Command Job screen is displayed.
2. Configure the following options: a. From the Command drop-down list, select a command. The available options are:
● Restart
● Wake on LAN
● Shutdown
● Query
● ReImage
● Lock—Applicable for ThinOS 8.x and ThinOS 9.x devices
● Send message—Applicable for Windows Embedded, ThinLinux, ThinOS 8.x, ThinOS 9.x, and Dell Hybrid Client powered devices
● Factory Reset—Applicable for ThinOS 8.x, ThinOS 9.x, and Dell Hybrid Client powered devices
178 Using Wyse Management Suite
The device command is a recurring job. On selected days of the week and at a specific time the commands are sent to the selected devices.
b. From the OS Type drop-down list, select the type of operating system.
c. In the Name field, Enter the name of the job.
d. From the Group drop-down list, select a group name.
e. Enter the job description.
f. From the Run drop-down list, select the date or time.
g. Enter or select the following details:
● Effective —Enter the starting and ending date.
● Start between —Enter the starting and ending time.
● On day(s) —Select the days of the week.
3. Click the Preview option to view the details of the scheduled job.
4. On the next page, click the Schedule option to initiate the job.
Managing rules
The Rules page enables you to add and manage the rules in the Wyse Management Suite console. The following filtering options are provided:
● Registration
● Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment
● Alert Notification
Editing a registration rule
About this task
Configure the rules for unmanaged devices by using the Registration option. To edit a registration rule, do the following:
Steps
1. Go to the Rules page.
2. Click Registration and select the unmanaged devices option.
3. Click Edit Rule .
The Edit Rule window is displayed.
You can view the following details:
● Rule
● Description
● Device Target
● Group
4. From the drop-down menu, select a target client to apply the Notification Target option and the time duration to apply the
Notification Frequency option.
NOTE: The notification frequency can be configured for every 4 hours, every 12 hours, daily, or weekly basis to the target device.
5. Enter the number of days until you want to apply the rule in the Apply rule after (1–30 days) box.
NOTE: By default, registration of an unmanaged devices are unregistered after 30 days.
6. Click Save .
Create unmanaged device auto assignment rules
About this task
To create rules for the unmanaged device auto assignment, do the following:
Using Wyse Management Suite 179
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment option.
3. Click the Add Rules tab.
4. Enter the Name , and select the Destination group .
5. Click the Add Condition option, and select the conditions for assigned rules.
6. Click Save .
The rule is displayed in the unmanaged group list. This rule is applied automatically, and the device is listed in the destination group.
NOTE:
● If a select group is set as the Destination Group, the condition Assign device to the destination group is not available.
● If a select group is set as the Destination Group, the condition Create a group under the destination group for each unique value is not available.
Edit an unmanaged device auto assignment rule
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment option.
3. Select the rule and click the Edit option.
4. Enter the Name and select the Destination group .
5. Click the Add Condition option and select the conditions for assigned rules.
6. Click Save .
Disable or delete a rule
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment option.
3. Select a rule and click the Disable Rule option.
The selected rule is disabled.
4. Select the disabled rule and click the Delete Disabled Rule(s) option.
The rule is deleted.
Save the rule order
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment option.
3. Select the rule which you want to move and then move it to the top order.
4. Click Save Rule Order .
Create a rule for alert notification
About this task
To create a rule for alert notification, do the following:
180 Using Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Alert Notification option.
3. Click Add Rule .
An Add Rule window is displayed.
4. From the Rule drop-down list, select a rule.
5. Enter the Description .
6. From the Group drop-down list, select the preferred option.
7. From the drop-down menu, select a target device to apply Notification Target and the time duration to apply Notification
Frequency .
8. Click Save .
Edit an alert notification rule
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Alert Notification option.
3. Click Edit Rule .
An Edit Rule window is displayed.
4. From the Rule drop-down list, select a rule.
5. Enter the Description .
6. From the Groups drop-down list, select a group.
7. From the drop-down list, select a target device to apply Notification Target and the time duration to apply Notification
Frequency .
8. Click Save .
Managing Events
The Events page enables you to view all events and alerts in the management system using the management console. It also provides instructions on viewing an audit of events and alerts for system auditing purposes.
A summary of events and alerts is used to obtain an easy-to-read daily summary of what has happened in the system. The Audit window arranges the information into a typical audit log-view. You can view the timestamp, event type, source, and description of each event in the order of time.
Search an event or alert using filters
Steps
1. Click Events .
The Events page is displayed.
2. From the Configuration Groups drop-down menu, select either the default policy group or the groups which are added by an administrator.
3. From the Events or Alerts drop-down menu, select any one of the following options:
● Events
● Current Alerts
● Alert History
4. From the Timeframe drop-down menu, select any one of the following operating systems:
This option enables you to view the events which occurred in a particular timeframe. The available options in the drop-down menu are:
● Today
● Yesterday
● This Week
Using Wyse Management Suite 181
● Custom
5. From the Event Type drop-down menu, select the operating system.
All the events are classified under particular groups. The available options in the drop-down menu are:
● Access
● Registration
● Configuration
● Remote Commands
● Management
● Compliance
Managing users
The Users page enables you to perform a routine user management task in the management console. The following are the two types of users:
● Administrators —Wyse Management Suite administrator can be assigned the role of a global administrator, group administrator, or viewer.
○ A Global Administrator has access to all the Wyse Management Suite functions.
○ A Group Administrator has access to all assets and functions for specific groups that are assigned to them.
○ A viewer has read-only access to all the data and can be assigned permissions to trigger the specific real-time commands, such as shutdown and restart.
If you select administrator, you can perform any of the following actions:
○ Add Admin
○ Edit Admin
○ Activate Admin (s)
○ Deactivate Admin (s)
○ Delete Admin (s)
○ Unlock Admin (s)
● Unassigned Admins —Users imported from the AD server are displayed on the Unassigned admins page. You can later assign a role to these users from the portal.
For better and faster management of users, select the users of your choice based on the available filter options. If you select
Unmanaged Users , you can perform any of the following actions:
○ Edit User
○ Activate User (s)
○ Deactivate User (s)
○ Delete User (s)
NOTE: To import users from the .CSV file, click Bulk Import .
Add a new admin profile
Steps
1. Go to the Users page.
2. Click Administrator (s) .
3. Click Add Admin .
The New Admin User window is displayed.
4. Enter your email ID and username in the respective fields.
5. Select the check box to use the same username as mentioned in the email.
6. Do one of the following:
● If you click the Personal Information tab, enter the following details:
○ First name
○ Last name
○ Title
182 Using Wyse Management Suite
○ Mobile phone number
● If you click the Roles tab, enter the following details: a. In the Roles section, from the Role drop-down list, select the Administrator role .
○ Global Administrator
○ Group Administrator
○ Viewer
NOTE: If you select the Administrator role as Viewer , the following administrative tasks are displayed:
￭ Query Device
￭ Unregister Device
￭ Restart/Shutdown Device
￭ Change Group Assignment
￭ Remote Shadow
￭ Lock Device
￭ Wipe Device
￭ Send Message
￭ WOL Device b. In the Password section, do the following: i.
Enter the custom password.
ii. To generate any random password, select the Generate random password radio button.
7. Click Save .
Create a WMS custom role in Wyse Management Suite
Using Wyse Management Suite 3.1 or later versions, a global administrator can create a new administrator role and provide granular permissions for different functionalities of Wyse Management Suite. You can create multiple users using the Custom
Global Administrator role.
Steps
1. Go to the Users tab.
2. Click Administrator(s) .
3. Click Add Admin .
The New Admin User window is displayed.
4. Enter the email ID and username in the respective fields.
5. Click Roles .
6. From the Role drop-down list, select Custom WMS Role .
7. Under each category, select the appropriate function that the user is allowed to perform.
8. Click Save .
The following table provides details about the supported and unsupported permissions that can be assigned to a custom role:
Table 49. Permissions for a custom role
Supported
Edit or Remove Configuration
Add, Edit, Delete Groups
Upload Reference files
Create device detail exception
Rules
Apps and data
Bulk import End users
Manage Remote Repository
Not supported
Bulk Device Exception
Create of Group Admin
Creation of Global Admin
Creation of Viewer Admin
Assigning Role to un-assigned Administrators
Subscription ( Export and Import license)
Changing WMS server URL
Changing MQTT URL
Using Wyse Management Suite 183
Table 49. Permissions for a custom role (continued)
Supported
Reports
Not supported
Uploading Config UI
Others
Active Directory on Portal Admin Page
Custom Branding
Create auto assignment rules for unmanaged devices
Steps
1. Click the Rules tab.
2. Select the Unmanaged Device Auto Assignment option.
3. Click the Add Rules tab.
4. Enter the Name and select the Destination group .
5. Click the Add Condition option and select the conditions for assigned rules.
6. Click Save .
The rule is displayed in the unmanaged group list. This rule is applied automatically and the device is listed in the destination group.
Add a user
Steps
1. Click the Users tab.
2. Click End Users .
3. Click Add User .
The Add User window is displayed.
4. Enter the username, domain, first name, last name, email address, title, and phone number.
5. Click Save .
Bulk import end users
Steps
1. Click Users .
The Users page is displayed.
2. Select the End Users option.
3. Click Bulk Import .
The Bulk Import window is displayed.
4. Click Browse , and select the .csv file.
5. Click Import .
Configure end user policy
You can configure and deploy settings to an individual user. The settings are applied to the user account and are applied to the thin client when the user logs in. This option is applicable only to thin clients running the ThinOS 9.x operating system and Dell
Hybrid Clients.
Steps
1. Click the Users tab.
2. Click End Users .
184 Using Wyse Management Suite
3. Select a user.
The End User Details page is displayed.
4. Click the Edit Policies drop-down menu and select the operating system.
5. Configure the required policies and click Save and Publish .
NOTE: There is no limit on the number of users in an on-premise environment. You can add 10,000 users in a public cloud environment.
Portal administration
The Portal administration page enables the system administration to perform tasks that are required to set up and maintain your system.
Adding the Active Directory server information
You can import Active Directory users and user groups to the Wyse Management Suite private cloud.
Steps
1. Log in to the Wyse Management Suite private cloud.
2. Go to Portal Admin > Console Settings > Active Directory (AD) .
3. Click the Add AD Server Information link.
4. Enter the server details such as AD Server Name , Domain Name , Server URL , and Port .
5. Click Save .
6. Click Import .
7. Enter the username and password.
NOTE: To search groups and users, you can filter them based on Search Base , and Group name contains options.
You can enter the values as following:
● OU=<OU Name> , for example, OU=TestOU
● DC=<Child Domain>, DC=<Parent Domain>, DC=com, for example, DC=Skynet, DC=Alpha, DC=Com
You can enter a space after a comma, but you cannot use single or double quotes.
8. Click Login .
9. On the User Group page, click Group name and enter the group name.
10. In the Search field, type the group name that you want to select.
11. Select a group.
The selected group is moved to the right pane of the page.
12. In the User Name Contents field , enter the user name .
13. Click Import Users or Import Groups .
NOTE: If you provide an invalid name or do not provide a last name, or provide any email address as name, then the entries cannot be imported into Wyse Management Suite. These entries are skipped during the user import process.
The Wyse Management Suite portal displays a confirmation message with the number of imported active directory users.
The imported active directory users are listed at Users tab > Unassigned Admins .
14. To assign different roles or permissions, select a user and click Edit User .
After you assign the roles to the active directory user, they are moved to the Administrators tab on the Users page.
Next steps
Active directory users can log in to the Wyse Management Suite Management portal by using the domain credentials. To log in to the Wyse Management Suite portal, do the following:
1. Start the Wyse Management Suite management portal.
2. On the login screen, click the Sign in with your domain credentials link.
Using Wyse Management Suite 185
3. Enter the domain user credentials, and click Sign In .
To log in to the Wyse Management Suite portal using child domain credentials, do the following:
1. Start the Wyse Management Suite management portal.
2. On the login screen, click the Sign in with your domain credentials link.
3. Click Change user domain .
4. Enter the user credentials and the complete domain name.
5. Click Sign In .
The imported Active Directory users can be activated or deactivated on the Users page by using the global administrator login.
If your account is deactivated, you cannot log in to the Wyse Management Suite Management portal.
NOTE: To import the users using LDAPS protocol, complete the following steps:
1. Import the AD Domain Server Root Certificate into Java Key Store Manually using the keytool. For example, <C:\Program Files\DELL\WMS\jdk1.8.0_152\jre\bin>keytool.exe>
-importcert -alias "WIN-O358EA52H8H" -keystore "<C:\Program
Files\DELL\WMS\jdk1.8.0_152\jre\lib\security\cacerts>" -storepass changeit -file
"Root Certificate Path"
2. Restart Tomcat service.
Configuring Active Directory Federation Services feature on public cloud
You can configure Active Directory Federation Services (ADFS) on a public cloud.
Steps
1. On the Portal Admin page, under Console Settings , click Active Directory (AD) .
2. Enter the Wyse Management Suite details to ADFS. To know the location details on the ADFS server where you must upload the Wyse Management Suite .xml files, hover over the information (i) icon.
NOTE: To download the Wyse Management Suite .xml file, click the download link.
3. Set the Wyse Management Suite rules in ADFS. To know the custom claim rule details, hover over the information (i) icon.
NOTE: To view the Wyse Management rules, click the Show WMS Rules link. You can also download the Wyse
Management Suite rules by clicking the link that is provided in the Wyse Management Suite Rules window.
4. To configure the ADFS details, click Add Configuration , and do the following:
NOTE: To allow tenants to follow the ADFS configuration, upload the ADFS metadata file.
a. To upload the .XML file stored on your thin client, click Load XML file .
The file is available at https://adfs.example.com/FederationMetadata/2007–06/
FederationMetadata.xml
.
b. Enter the details of the entity ID and X.509 signing certificate in the respective boxes.
c. Enter the ADFS login URL address and the ADFS logout URL address in the respective boxes.
d. To enable tenants to configure Single Sign-On by using ADFS, select the Enable SSO login using ADFS check box. This feature follows the Security Assertion and Markup Language (SAML) standard specification.
e. To validate the configuration information, click Test ADFS Login . This enables tenants to test their setup before saving.
NOTE: Tenants can activate/deactivate SSO login by using ADFS.
5. Click Save .
6. After you save the metadata file, click Update Configuration .
NOTE: Tenants can log in and log out by using their AD credentials that are configured from their ADFS. You must ensure that the AD users are imported to the Wyse Management Suite server. On the login page, click Sign in and enter your domain credentials. You must provide the email address of your AD user and sign in. To import a user to
186 Using Wyse Management Suite
the public cloud , remote repository must be installed. For more information about the ADFS documentation, go to
Technet.microsoft.com
.
Results
After the ADFS test connection is successful, import the users using AD connector present in the remote repository.
Wyse Management suite Active Directory group feature matrix
Table 50. Wyse Management suite Active Directory group feature matrix
Feature Sub-Feature AD User Group User Exception
Region & Language Supported Supported Region&Language
Settings
Privacy&Security SCEP Not applicable Not applicable
Privacy&Security
Privacy&Security
Privacy&Security
Privacy&Security
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Broker Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Session Settings
Login Experience
Login Experience
Login Experience
Login Experience
Personalization
Personalization
Device Security
Account Privileges
Certificates
Security Policy
Global Citrix Broker
Settings
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Citrix Broker Settings Supported
VMware Broker
Settings
Supported
Windows Virtual
Desktop Settings
Supported
Supported Microsoft Remote
Desktop Settings
Amazon WorkSpaces
Settings
Supported
Teradici Cloud Access
Settings
Global Session
Settings
Supported
Supported
Citrix Session Settings Supported
Blast Session Settings Supported
PCoIP Session
Settings
RDP and WVD Session
Settings
Supported
Supported
Not applicable 3rd Party
Authentication
SmartCard Settings
Login Settings
Session setttings
Shortcut Keys
Device Info
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Select Group
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Using Wyse Management Suite 187
Table 50. Wyse Management suite Active Directory group feature matrix (continued)
Feature
Personalization
Sub-Feature
Desktop
AD User Group
Supported
User Exception
Supported
Select Group
Supported
Personalization
Personalization
Screen Saver
User Experience
Settings
RFIdeas Reader
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Peripheral
Management
Firmware
Firmware
Printers
Audio
Touch
Serial Port
USB Redirection
Monitor
Mouse
Keyboard
Device Headset
Settings
CCID
Touchpad
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not applicable
Not applicable
Firmware
System Settings
System Settings
System Settings
System Settings
Network
Configuration
Network
Configuration
OS Firmware Updates Not applicable
Application Package
Updates
Not applicable
Not applicable BIOS Firmware
Updates
Power and Sleep
Settings
Not applicable
Scheduled Reboot
Settings
Scheduled Shutdown
Settings
Device Settings
Ethernet Settings
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
DHCP Settings Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
188 Using Wyse Management Suite
Table 50. Wyse Management suite Active Directory group feature matrix (continued)
Feature
Network
Configuration
Sub-Feature
DNS Settings
AD User Group
Not applicable
User Exception
Not applicable
Select Group
Not applicable
VPN Settings Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Network
Configuration
Network
Configuration
Network
Configuration
Network
Configuration
Network
Configuration
Services
Services
Services
BIOS
BIOS
BIOS
BIOS
Bluetooth Settings
Proxy Settings
Wireless
Common Settings
VNC Service
WMS Settings
Troubleshooting
Settings
Dell Wyse 3040
Dell Wyse 5070
Dell Wyse 5470
Dell Wyse 5470 AIO
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Import unassigned users or user groups to public cloud through active directory
Steps
network and must have the access to the AD server to pull the users.
2. Register the repository to public cloud. Once registered, follow the steps mentioned on the UI to import the users to Wyse
Management Suite public cloud. You can edit the roles of the AD user after importing to Wyse Management Suite public cloud.
3. Set up ADFS on public cloud.
Access Wyse Management Suite file repository
File repositories are places where files are stored and organized. Wyse Management Suite has two types of repositories:
● Local Repository —During the Wyse Management Suite private cloud installation, provide the local repository path in the Wyse Management Suite installer. After the installation, go to Portal Admin > File Repository and select the local repository. Click the Edit option to view and edit the repository settings.
● Wyse Management Suite Repository —Log in to Wyse Management Suite public cloud, go to , Portal Admin > File
Repository and download the Wyse Management Suite repository installer. After the installation, register the Wyse
Management Suite repository to Wyse Management Suite Management server by providing the required information.
You can enable the Automatic Replication option to replicate files that are added to any of the file repositories to other repositories. When you enable this option, an alert message is displayed. You can select the Replicate existing files check box to replicate the existing files to your file repositories.
Replicate existing file option is applicable if the repository is already registered. When a new repository is registered, then all the files are copied to the new repository. You can view the file replication status in the Events page.
Using Wyse Management Suite 189
The Image Pull templates are not replicated automatically to other repositories. You must copy these files manually.
File Replication feature is supported only on repositories from Wyse Management Suite 2.0 and later versions.
You cannot import self-signed certificate of the remote repository to the Wyse Management Suite server. If the CA Validation is enabled for remote repository, then the replication of files from the remote repository to the local repository fails.
To use Wyse Management Suite repository, do the following:
1. Download the Wyse Management Suite repository from the public cloud console.
2. After the installation process, start the application.
3. On the Wyse Management Suite Repository page, enter the credentials to register the Wyse Management Suite repository to Wyse Management Suite server.
4. If you enable the Register to Public WMS Management Portal option, you can register the repository to Wyse
Management Suite public cloud.
5. Click the Sync Files option to send the sync file command.
6. Click Check In and then click Send Command to send the device information command to the device.
7. Click the Unregister option to unregister the on-premises service.
8. Click Edit to edit the files.
9. From the drop-down list of Concurrent File Downloads option, select the number of files.
10. Enable or disable Wake on LAN option.
11. Enable or disable Fast File Upload and Download (HTTP) option.
● When HTTP is enabled, the file upload and download occurs over HTTP.
● When HTTP is not enabled, the file upload and download occurs over HTTPS.
12. Select the Certificate Validation check box to enable the CA validation for public cloud.
NOTE: When CA Validation from Wyse Management Suite server is enabled, the certificate should be present in the client. All the operations such as, Apps and Data, Image Pull/Push is successful. If certificate is not present in the client, the Wyse Management Suite server provides one generic audit event message Failed to Validate Certificate
Authority under Events page. All the operations such as, Apps and Data, Image Pull/Push is not successful. Also, when
CA Validation from Wyse Management Suite server is disabled, the communication from server and client happens in secure channel without Certificate Signature validation.
13. Add a note in the provided box.
14. Click Save Settings .
Subnet mapping
From Wyse Management Suite 2.0, you can assign a subnet to a file repository. You can associate a file repository up to 25 subnets or ranges. You can also prioritize the subnets that are associated with the repository.
You can deploy the BIOS packages using subnet mapping from Wyse Management Suite 2.1 .You can upload and deploy multiple firmware packages from the remote repository, tenant cloud repository, or operator cloud repository. This feature is applicable only on Wyse Management Suite Pro license.
NOTE: Subnet Proximity is not supported on ThinOS 9.x devices.
Configure subnet mapping
Steps
1. Go to Portal Administration > File Repositories .
190 Using Wyse Management Suite
Figure 53. File repository
2. Select a file repository.
3. Click the Subnet Mapping option.
4. Enter subnets or ranges, one value per line. You must use hyphen for range separation.
5. Optionally, clear the Allow devices from subnets not mapped to this file repository to download files from this repository as a fallback method using subnet proximity check box if you want the file repository to be accessed only through the configured subnets or ranges.
NOTE: The Allow devices from subnets not mapped to this file repository to download files from this repository as a fallback method using subnet proximity option is selected by default. This feature is not supported on ThinOS 9.x devices.
Using Wyse Management Suite 191
12
Troubleshooting your thin client
About this task
You can use the troubleshooting options on the ThinOS desktop to troubleshoot your device.
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click Troubleshooting .
The Troubleshooting dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the General tab, and use the following guidelines:
● Click the Extract CMOS option to extract the CMOS settings and certain BIOS settings to the USB drive or file server based on your target device selection.
● Click the Restore CMOS option to write the CMOS settings and BIOS settings from the USB drive to the target thin client.
● Click the Performance Monitor option to display the CPU usage history with the Memory, and Networking information.
The graphs display on top of all windows.
● Click the Force Coredump option to forcibly generate the debug information for technical investigation when your system is not responding. Both the coredump file and the trap information image are saved to the local drive.
After you restart the thin client, both the coredump file and trap issue screenshot file are uploaded to the /wnos/ troubleshoot/ directory of the file server or a USB drive.
● Click the Export System Setting option to export the system settings file to the USB drive that is connected to the thin client. Password is mandatory for the exported file. The file is stored in the /wnos/trouble_shoot/ folder of the
USB drive.
● Click the Export Screenshot option to export the system screenshots to the USB drive that is connected to the thin client. The file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive.
● Click the Export logs option to export the system log files to the USB drive that is connected to the thin client. The file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_201910107_125610.tgz
.
● Click the Import System Setting option to import the system settings file from the USB drive that is connected to the thin client. The file is stored in the /wnos/trouble_shoot/ folder of the USB drive.
3. Click the Capture tab, and do the following:
● Capture Network Packets —Use this option to capture network-related logs.
a. Connect a USB drive to the thin client.
b. To start logging the unexpected error messages, enable the Capture Network Packets option, and click OK .
c. To stop logging the unexpected error messages, disable the Capture Network Packets option, and click OK .
d. Open the Troubleshooting window, and click Export Logs on the General tab. The log file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_201910107_125610.tgz
.
e. Extract the tgz file. The log files are available at ./var/log/netmng/ .
● Capture Wireless Packets —Use this option to capture wireless network-related logs.
a. Connect a USB drive to the thin client.
b. To start logging the unexpected error messages, enable the Capture Wireless Packets option, and click OK .
c. To stop logging the unexpected error messages, disable the Capture Wireless Packets option, and click OK .
d. Open the Troubleshooting window, and click Export Logs on the General tab. The log file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_201910107_125610.tgz
.
e. Extract the tgz file. The log files are available at ./var/log/netmng/ .
● Capture USB Packets —Use this option to capture USB packets.
a. Connect a USB drive to the thin client.
b. To start logging the unexpected error messages, enable the Capture USB Packets option, and click OK .
c. To stop logging the unexpected error messages, disable the Capture USB Packets option, and click OK .
d. Open the Troubleshooting window, and click Export Logs on the General tab. The log file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_201910107_125610.tgz
.
e. Extract the tgz file. The log files are available at ./compat/linux/var/usbdump/ .
● Capture User Coredump —Use this option to capture coredump files.
192 Troubleshooting your thin client
a. Connect a USB drive to the thin client.
b. To start logging the unexpected error messages, enable the Capture User Coredump option, and click OK .
c. To stop logging the unexpected error messages, disable the Capture User Coredump option, and click OK .
d. Open the Troubleshooting window, and click Export Logs on the General tab. The log file is stored in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_201910107_125610.tgz
.
e. Extract the tgz file. The log files are available at ./compat/linux/var/usbdump/ .
4. Click the Ping tab, and do the following: a. Enter the IP address, DNS-registered hostname, or WINS-registered hostname of the target.
b. Click Start .
The data area displays the ping response messages. The ping command sends one echo request per second, calculates round-trip times and packet loss statistics, and displays a brief summary upon completing the calculation. If the host is operational and on the network, it responds to the echo request. By default, echo requests are sent until interrupted by clicking Stop .
NOTE:
Ping sends an echo request to a network host. The host parameter is either a valid hostname or an IP address. If the host is operational and on the network, it responds to the echo request. Ping sends one echo request per second and calculates round-trip times and packet loss statistics. It displays a brief summary upon completion of the calculation.
NOTE: Not all network equipment responds to ping packets, as it is a common mechanism that is used in denial-ofservice attacks. Lack of response does not necessarily indicate that the target of the ping is unusable for other purposes.
5. Click the Trace Route tab, and do the following: a. Enter the IP address, DNS-registered hostname, or WINS-registered hostname of the target.
b. Click Start .
The data area displays round-trip response time and identifying information for each device in the path.
The tracert utility traces the path from your thin client to a network host. The host parameter is either a valid hostname or an IP address. The tracert utility sends out a packet of information three times to each device (routers and computers) in the path. The round-trip response time and the identifier information are displayed in the message box.
6. Click the Telnet tab, and do the following: a. Click Telnet .
b. Enter the hostname.
c. Enter a port number.
d. Select a color theme.
e. Click Connect to connect to a remote host or device.
7. Click the Network tab, and view detailed information related to your network connection.
● Click the Diagnostics button to run a diagnostic test on your network connection.
● Click the Export log button to export the network logs to the target device.
8. Click OK to save your settings.
Capture an HTTP log using ThinOS
About this task
To capture an HTTP log, do the following:
Steps
1. From the desktop menu, click System Setup > Admin Policy Tool .
The Configuration Control || ThinOS window is displayed.
2. In the Troubleshooting Settings window, click the Enable HTTP Log option.
The HTTP log feature is enabled on the thin client.
3. Log in to the Citrix session.
If the authentication fails, do the following:
Troubleshooting your thin client 193
a. Open the Troubleshooting window from the left menu on the ThinOS desktop.
b. Connect the USB drive to the thin client, and click Export logs .
All trace files including the event logs are exported to the USB drive. The log file is saved in the root folder of the USB drive— system_log_20191107_125610.tgz
.
c. Extract the tgz file, and verify if the http.log
file is available.
System crashes, freezes or restarts abruptly
If the system crashes, freezes, or restarts abruptly, coredump is generated. You must export logs to analyze the root cause for failure.
About this task
To export logs, do the following:
Steps
1. Reboot the thin client.
2. Export relevant logs using one of the following methods:
● Use the Export logs option on the General tab in the Troubleshooting window on the ThinOS client.
● Use the Wyse Management Suite console.
3. Analyze the detailed error log report.
Broker agent login failure
If login to a Broker agent connection fails, you must do either of the following:
● Capture an HTTP log and analyze the detailed error log report.
● If the Broker agent can be accessed on a ThinOS 8.6 client, capture the network log and analyze the detailed error log report.
Citrix desktop and application crashes abruptly
If the Citrix desktop or application crashes abruptly, but the ThinOS client is still working, then a coredump is generated. You must export logs to analyze the root cause for failure.
About this task
To export logs, do the following:
Steps
1. Reboot the thin client.
2. Export relevant logs using one of the following methods:
● Use the Export logs option on the General tab in the Troubleshooting window on the ThinOS client.
● Use the Wyse Management Suite console.
3. Analyze the detailed error log report.
Unified Communications software call failure
If the Unified Communications software call fails, but the ThinOS client is still working, then a coredump is generated. You must export logs to analyze the root cause for failure.
About this task
To export logs, do the following:
194 Troubleshooting your thin client
Steps
1. Reboot the thin client.
2. Export relevant logs using one of the following methods:
● Use the Export logs option on the General tab in the Troubleshooting window on the ThinOS client.
● Use the Wyse Management Suite console.
3. Analyze the detailed error log report.
Request a log file using Wyse Management Suite
Prerequisites
The device must be enabled to pull the log file.
Steps
1. Go to the Devices page, and click a particular device.
The device details are displayed.
2. Click the Device Log tab.
3. Click Request Log File .
4. After the log files are uploaded to the Wyse Management Suite server, click the Click here link, and download the logs.
NOTE: The ThinOS device uploads the system logs.
View audit logs using Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. Go to Events > Audit .
2. From the Configuration Groups drop-down list, select a group for which you want to view the audit log.
3. From the Timeframe drop-down list, select the time period to view the events that occurred during that time period.
The Audit window arranges the information into a typical audit log-view. You can view the timestamp, event type, source, and description of each event in the order of time.
System log and trace information
Log/trace size and configuration
Table 51. Log/trace size and configuration
Type Cleanup after maximum size
System log
Network/wireless trace
10 MB
200 MB
USB packet
HTTP log
System configuration
200 MB
10 MB
NA
Comments
No encryption. It is required that admin users do not open this access to all other users. Only enable for target users.
During export, ask admin to encrypt with password
Troubleshooting your thin client 195
How to enable and collect logs?
Table 52. Enabling and collecting logs
Type
System log
Enabling
Always enabled
Capturing
Always captured
Network/wireless trace Enable in Admin
Policy Tool
USB packet Enable in Admin
Policy Tool
HTTP log Enable in Admin
Policy Tool
Reboot after enabling
Reboot after enabling
Reboot after enabling
Collecting
Using Wyse Management Suite or
USB drive
Using Wyse Management Suite or
USB drive
Using Wyse Management Suite or
USB drive
Using Wyse Management Suite or
USB drive
Upgrade or conversion troubleshooting and logs
Upgrade using Merlin image—individual user
After a successful upgrade process, if there is no Wyse Management Suite, the system reboots to ThinOS 9.x OOBE screen.
Wyse Management Suite deployment
1. Refer Migration Guide or Wyse Management Suite 3.1 Administrator's Guide.
2. Upgrade Wyse Management Suite version to 3.1.
At this stage the client is still running ThinOS 8.6.
3. Wyse Management Suite admin user configures two sets of policies—one for ThinOS 8.6 and the other for ThinOS 9.x.
For example, upload the ThinOS 9.1 conversion image to ThinOS 8.6 policy and upload ThinOS application packages to
ThinOS 9.x policy. At this stage the client is still running ThinOS 8.6
4. Push the conversion image from ThinOS 8.6 policy.
At this stage, the client updates from ThinOS 8.6 to 9.1 and starts reading the policy.
5. To finish the upgrade process, update ThinOS application package from ThinOS 9.x policy.
Wyse Management Suite admin-How to verify whether correct images or
PKG files are uploaded?
● Check the Wyse Management Suite uploading progress indicator and completion message.
● Verify whether the uploaded files are showing up in the Wyse Management Suite image or PKG dropdown.
How to verify a download or installation are in progress?
● There is no progress bar or success message from Wyse Management Suite.
● After successful completion, the managed group and unit version information is updated in Wyse Management Suite.
● On ThinOS 8.6, initially there are messages in the event log. After retrieving the image, the installation starts similar to
ThinOS 8.6, followed by a system reboot, and the installation continues in ThinOS 9.1. After the installation, the system reboots to ThinOS 9.1.
196 Troubleshooting your thin client
How to verify whether the image installation is completed successfully?
● After the last auto reboot, the thin client boots up to the Wyse Management Suite configuration from group 9.x policy.
● Verify the success info and system info in the unit system information or package information.
How to recover during a failure?
● If there is a failure message stating Upgrade break cannot boot up , use USB recovery.
● If there is a wrong image or PKG, and the device shows wrong screen or info, use USB recovery.
How to verify whether the thin client is working properly?
Go to System information > Event Log and see if the system info or PKG versions are correct.
If any unexpected issues occur before VDI logon, collect the following data:
● General troubleshooting
○ General > Export system setting
○ General > Export Screenshot
○ General > Export logs
● Network troubleshooting
○ Capture > Capture Network Packets
○ Capture > Capture Wireless Packets
● Peripherals troubleshooting
○ Capture > Capture USB Packets
Logs to capture during VDI logon failure
If you face VDI or cloud sign-on failure, go to Capture > HTTP log and collect the data for analysis.
Logs to capture when session failure after launch
After you signed on VDI or cloud, if the remote desktop connection failed to launch or failed after launch, go to General >
Export logs and collect the data for analysis.
Important information
● The System configuration export is encrypted with a password and the administrator is prompted to provide password protection upon using this option.
● Administrator must manage the enablement of the export options on the thin client. It is recommended to not enable export options to all users.
How to debug with new support beyond ThinOS 8?
Reproduce the problem with any other ThinOS 9 unit and capture logs/trace from ThinOS 9 for support analysis.
How to debug with same support in ThinOS 8?
Capture the ThinOS 9 related logs/trace and also capture the related logs/trace in ThinOS 8 following same steps where it works. Send both to the support team for comparison and analysis. This can help isolate the root cause sooner.
Troubleshooting your thin client 197
Common log files and locations
The file is named in the pattern system_log_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tgz. The following table contains the locations where the log files are saved.
Table 53. Common log file locations
Type
Device log
Citrix
Smart card AuthManager
RTME
JVDI
Network
Coredump
System daemon xorg server logs
Location
…\compat\linux\home\tmp\wlogd\wlogd.log
… \compat\linux\var\volatile\log\citrix.log
…\compat\linux\home\warthog\.ICAClient\logs
…
\compat\linux\var\volatile\log\RTMediaEngineSRV\MediaEn gineSRVDebugLogs
…\compat\linux\var\volatile\log\cisco\
…\compat\linux\var\volatile\log\netmng\nn.log or …
\compat\linux\var\log\netmng (see wireshark log)
…\var\crash\vmcore.0zst
…\compat\linux\home\tmp\wlogd\wlogd.log
…\compat\linux\tmp\wlogd
198 Troubleshooting your thin client
13
Frequently Asked Questions
ThinOS-related questions
This section contains frequently asked questions related to Wyse ThinOS.
How do I upgrade from ThinOS 8.6 to 9.1?
You must use the Wyse Management Suite version 3.1 to upgrade from ThinOS 8.6 to 9.1. For the firmware upgrade procedure, see
Firmware upgrade and package deployment or the
Dell Wyse ThinOS 9.1 Migration Guide .
What should I do if the package installation fails?
If the thin client does not work after upgrading to the new firmware, or if the package fails to update, remove all packages and reboot the thin client. After rebooting the thin client, reinstall the package.
Is Wyse Management Suite 3.1 the only way to manage ThinOS 9.1?
ThinOS 9.1-devices can be managed using either Wyse Management Suite or Admin Policy Tool.
Is USB Imaging Tool method a possible option for upgrading to
ThinOS 9.1?
It is recommended to use Wyse Management Suite version 3.1 to upgrade your thin clients since you cannot deploy large-scale clients using the USB Imaging Tool. However, you can use the USB Imaging Tool method for installing ThinOS 9.1 on a single device.
Can ThinOS 9.1 be installed on a PCoIP device?
ThinOS 9.1 is supported on PCoIP devices.
Does ThinOS 9.1 support zero desktop?
In ThinOS 9.1, the zero desktop is renamed to modern desktop. You can enable the modern desktop mode using either Wyse
Management Suite or the Admin Policy Tool.
Does ThinOS 9.1 support ThinOS configurations using INI files?
ThinOS 9.1 does not support INI files. You need to use Wyse Management Suite 3.1 or the local Admin Policy Tool to configure the advanced ThinOS settings.
Frequently Asked Questions 199
iPhone cannot be redirected to the Citrix Desktop session
Steps
1. Open Global Connection Settings .
2. Uncheck Exclude disk devices and Exclude audio devices .
Android smartphone is not displayed in the session when redirected or mapped
You must select the option to transfer images on your smartphone when you connect the USB cable.
Does Citrix Workspace app replace Citrix Receiver on ThinOS?
In ThinOS 9.x, Citrix Receiver is replaced by Citrix Workspace app. Citrix Workspace app, a client software released by Citrix, enables you to access all your virtual apps, desktops, and other Citrix products from a single workspace UI. You must deploy the
ICA package using Wyse Management Suite to install the Citrix Workspace app on ThinOS 9.x.
For more information about deploying packages using Wyse Management Suite, see
How to upload and push ThinOS 9.1
.
What is Workspace mode on ThinOS 9.1?
Workspace mode enables you to customize the look and feel of your ThinOS to match the Citrix Workspace-based layout of published applications and desktops. Workspace mode displays both the ThinOS full taskbar and the workspace desktop. You can select the Workspace Mode check box in the Broker Setup window.
Can I enable Flash content to be rendered using a local Flash Player on ThinOS 9.1?
ThinOS 9.1 does not support the Flash Redirection feature. Hence, you cannot enable Flash content to be rendered using a local
Flash Player.
How do I verify if HDX Enlightened Data Transport Protocol is active?
To verify if HDX Enlightened Data Transport Protocol is active:
● In an ICA desktop session, run the command netstat -a -p UDP in command prompt, and check if the VDA is using UDP ports 1494 and 2598.
● In an ICA desktop session, run the command ctxsession.exe
in command prompt, and check if the transport protocol is using UDP > CGP > ICA .
● Go to Citrix Director, access the session details and check if the Connection Type/Protocol is UDP.
Alternatively, you can use the HDX Monitor tool to check parameter Component_Protocol=UDP-CGP-ICA.
For more information, see the article CTX220730 at www.support.citrix.com
.
How do I check if HTML5 Video Redirection is working?
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have enabled the HTML5 video redirection policy on the server side.
200 Frequently Asked Questions
Steps
1. Launch a Citrix session on your thin client.
2. Open a web browser and play a video.
3. Move the browser on the screen or scroll the browser.
4. Notice a delay or jump in the video window.
This noticeable lag in the video window indicates that the video is being redirected.
How do I check if QUMU Multimedia URL Redirection is working?
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have installed the QUMU on the remote desktop.
Steps
1. Launch a Citrix session on your thin client.
2. Open a web browser and play a QUMU published video.
3. Move the browser on the screen or scroll the browser.
4. Notice a delay or jump in the video window.
This noticeable lag in the video window indicates that the video is being redirected.
How do I check if Windows Media Redirection is working?
Prerequisites
● Ensure that the Windows Media redirection policy is set to Allowed in Citrix Studio.
● Ensure that you have enabled the Enable HDX/MMR check box in the Global Connection Settings dialog box on the
ThinOS client.
Steps
1. Connect to a Citrix server, and launch an ICA desktop.
2. Play a video or an audio file using Windows Media Player.
3. Drag and move the Windows Media Player.
Notice that the video graphic and the media player window frame are in different layer.
You can also determine if Windows Media Redirection is working using the method that is described in the CTX215173 article at support.citrix.com
.
Is persistent logging supported in ThinOS?
Persistent logging is not supported in ThinOS.
Is tls.txt file included in network traces on ThinOS?
The tls.txt file is not included in network traces for ThinOS.
Will ThinOS 9.1 device reboot automatically when the system crashes?
ThinOS 9.1-based device automatically reboots when the system crashes. System backs up the data every one hour. If any key applications, such as ThinOS window crashes, the system still runs and is recovered without a reboot.
Frequently Asked Questions 201
Wyse Management Suite-related questions
This section contains frequently asked questions related to Wyse Management Suite.
What takes precedence between Wyse Management Suite and
ThinOS UI when conflicting settings are enforced?
Any settings that are configured using Wyse Management Suite take precedence over the settings that were configured locally on the ThinOS client or published using the Admin Policy Tool. The settings that are configured locally in the ThinOS are synced to Admin Policy Tool but not to Wyse Management Suite.
The following order defines the priority set for ThinOS configurations:
Wyse Management Suite Policies > Admin Policy Tool > Local ThinOS UI
How do I import users from a .csv file?
Steps
1. Click Users .
The Users page is displayed.
2. Select the Unassigned Admins option.
3. Click Bulk Import .
The Bulk Import window is displayed.
4. Click Browse and select the .csv file.
5. Click Import .
How do I use Wyse Management Suite file repository?
Steps
1. Download the Wyse Management Suite repository from the public cloud console.
2. After the installation process, start the application.
3. On the Wyse Management Suite Repository page, enter the credentials to register the Wyse Management Suite repository to the Wyse Management Suite server.
4. To register the repository to the Wyse Management Suite public cloud, enable the Register to Public WMS Management
Portal option.
5. Click the Sync Files option to send the sync file command.
6. Click Check In and then click Send Command to send the device information command to the device.
7. Click the Unregister option to unregister the on-premises service.
8. Click Edit to edit the files.
a. From the drop-down list of Concurrent File Downloads option, select the number of files.
b. Enable or disable Wake on LAN option.
c. Enable or disable Fast File Upload and Download (HTTP) option.
● When HTTP is enabled, the file upload and download occurs over HTTP.
● When HTTP is not enabled, the file upload and download occurs over HTTPS.
d. Select the Certificate Validation check box to enable the CA validation for a public cloud.
NOTE:
● When CA Validation from the Wyse Management Suite server is enabled, the certificate should be present in the client. All the operations, such as, Apps and Data, Image Pull/Push is successful. If the certificate is not present in the client, the Wyse Management Suite server provides one generic audit event message Failed to Validate
Certificate Authority under Events page. All the operations, such as, Apps and Data, Image Pull/Push is not successful.
202 Frequently Asked Questions
● When CA Validation from Wyse Management Suite server is disabled, then the communication from server and client happens in a secure channel without Certificate Signature validation.
e. Add a note in the provided box.
f. Click Save Settings .
How do I check the version of Wyse Management Suite
Steps
1. Log in to Wyse Management Suite.
2. Go to Portal Administration > Subscription .
The Wyse Management Suite version is displayed in the Server Information field.
Frequently Asked Questions 203
advertisement
Key Features
- Enhanced security features to protect your data and devices.
- Support for a wide range of peripherals, including printers, scanners, and webcams.
- Improved performance and stability for a smoother and more responsive user experience.
- Simplified management and deployment tools to make it easy to manage your thin clients and zero clients.
- Support for the latest hardware and software technologies, including Windows 10 and Linux.
- A variety of customization options to tailor the operating system to your specific needs.
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
How do I upgrade the ThinOS firmware?
How do I configure account privileges for ThinOS?
How do I connect to a remote server?
advertisement